JP2020151279A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To attract attention suitably.SOLUTION: A sub-control part can display a menu screen by receiving a player's operation of a performance switch after completion of each game, and validates the player's operation of the performance switch at timing when attention attracting display is completed while invalidating the player's operation of the performance switch when attention attracting display is underway. More specifically, the sub-control part displays the menu screen when a player operates the performance switch after completion of attention attracting display while it does not display the menu screen even if the player operates the performance switch when attention attracting display is underway.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 35

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that plays a game.

As a gaming machine, a slot machine in which a predetermined number of bets is set and a plurality of types of identification information are variably displayed based on the acceptance of a start operation, or a gaming medium such as a gaming ball is launched into a gaming area by a launching device. There is a pachinko game machine or the like in which a plurality of types of identification information are variably displayed when a game medium wins a prize in a starting area such as a winning opening provided in the game area.

As such a game machine, a device that displays a caution notification image for preventing the player from being absorbed in the game has been proposed as an example of an advantageous state that is advantageous for the player, such as at the end of a big hit gaming state. (See, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-154687

In the technique described in Patent Document 1, attention is paid by displaying an image different from the caution notification image, for example, a menu screen in which any menu can be selected from a plurality of types of menus as an example of a setting screen for setting a game. There is a risk that the effect of alerting may be impaired by deviating the player's attention to the alert image, and there is room for improvement in the display of the alert image.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of appropriately calling attention.

In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention
It is a game machine that plays games
An advantageous state control means that can control an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player,
A warning display means for displaying a warning to the player in connection with the end of control of the advantageous state, and
A setting suggestion display means for displaying a setting suggestion suggesting a setting value selected from a plurality of types of setting values having different advantages in relation to the end of control of the advantageous state, and
It is equipped with a setting screen display means capable of displaying a setting screen for making settings related to the game in relation to the operation of the setting operation means by the player.
The setting screen display means does not display the setting screen even if the setting operation means is operated by the player while the warning display is being performed, while the setting is made by the player after the warning display is completed. When the operating means is operated, the setting screen is displayed and
The display period of the setting suggestion display is longer than the display period of the caution display.

It is a front view of the slot machine which concerns on Embodiment 1. It is a block diagram which shows the internal structure of a slot machine. It is a figure for demonstrating display contents such as various indicators controlled by a main control unit, output ports to which LEDs are connected, and various indicators. It is a figure for demonstrating the display mode of various indicators in various control states controlled by a main control unit. It is a figure for demonstrating the control of the display mode of various indicators and LEDs in a predetermined game. It is a figure for demonstrating the control of the display mode of various indicators and LEDs in the last game in BB. It is a figure for demonstrating the control of the display mode of various indicators and LEDs in the last game in CB about a modification. It is a figure which shows the 7-segment display. It is a figure which shows the output port, DG and the like. It is a flowchart which shows the signal switching process executed by a main CPU. It is a figure which shows the switching of a selection signal. It is a timing chart when it shifts to a special state. It is a timing chart when it shifts to a special state about a modification. It is a figure for demonstrating the production at the time of entering a bonus. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect at the time of selecting a bonus effect. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect at the time of winning notification when a bell is won in the final game in the bonus. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect at the time of result notification during freeze. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect at the time of result notification during freeze. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect at the time of selecting an RT effect. It is a timing chart of processing by a main control part and a sub control part. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect at the time of result notification during freezing about a modification. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect at the time of result notification during freezing about a modification. It is a figure which shows the state that a specific effect is executed in a slot machine. It is a timing chart of the execution example of a specific effect. This is a timing chart of the basic pattern of the alert display. (A) The timing chart of the first embodiment of the warning display when an error occurs, and (B) the timing chart of the second embodiment of the warning display when an error occurs. It is a figure which shows the production example of the 1st Embodiment of the warning display when an error occurs. It is a figure which shows the production example of the 2nd Embodiment of the warning display when an error occurs. (A) The timing chart of the first embodiment of the warning display when a power failure occurs, and (B) The timing chart of the second embodiment of the warning display when a power failure occurs. It is a figure which shows the production example of the 1st Embodiment of the caution display at the time of the electric power failure occurrence. It is a figure which shows the production example of the 2nd Embodiment of the warning display at the time of the electric power failure occurrence. (A) A timing chart of a third embodiment of a warning display when an error occurs, and (B) a timing chart of a third embodiment of a warning display when a power failure occurs. It is a figure which shows the production example of the 3rd Embodiment of the warning display when an error occurs. It is a figure which shows the production example of the 3rd Embodiment of the warning display at the time of the electric power failure occurrence. It is a timing chart of the basic pattern of the production after the end of the bonus according to the second embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect at the time of winning notification when a bell is won in the final game in the bonus. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect at the time of result notification during freeze. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect at the time of result notification during freeze. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect at the time of selecting an RT effect. It is a figure for demonstrating the example of changing the setting suggestion display. It is a figure for demonstrating the state suggestion display after the next game. It is a timing chart of the 4th embodiment of the warning display when an error occurs. It is a timing chart of the 4th embodiment of the warning display when a power failure occurs. It is a figure which shows the effect example of 4th Embodiment of the warning display at the time of an error occurrence. It is a figure which shows the production example of the 4th Embodiment of the caution display at the time of the electric power failure occurrence.

[Embodiment 1]
An embodiment for implementing a slot machine as an example of the gaming machine according to the present invention will be described based on the first embodiment shown below.

[Slot machine configuration]
FIG. 1 is a front view of the slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment. As shown in FIG. 1, the slot machine 1 is composed of a housing 1a having an open front surface and a front door 1b rotatably and pivotally supported at a side end of the housing 1a. Inside the slot machine 1, reels 2L, 2C, and 2R (hereinafter, left reel, middle reel, and right reel) in which a plurality of types of symbols that can be distinguished from each other are arranged in the same number in a predetermined order are arranged in the horizontal direction. Three consecutive symbols among the symbols arranged on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are arranged side by side in the upper, middle, lower, and lower three stages in the see-through window 3 provided in the substantially center of the front of the slot machine 1. It is displayed and arranged so that it can be seen from the player side.

Although the configuration using three reels is illustrated in the present embodiment, a configuration using only one reel, a configuration using two reels, and a configuration using four or more reels may be used. .. Further, in the present embodiment, the variable display unit for variably displaying the symbols by the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is configured, but the variable display unit may be other than the reel, for example, a plurality of symbols on the outer peripheral surface. A configuration in which the symbol can be changed and displayed by moving the belt on which the reels are arranged may be used. Further, in the present embodiment, the variable display unit is configured by a physical reel, but the variable display unit may be configured by an image display device such as a liquid crystal display.

On the front of the slot machine 1, as shown in FIG. 1, a medal insertion section 4 into which medals can be inserted, a medal payout exit 9 from which medals are paid out, and credits (the number of medals stored as a player-owned game value) ), As a MAXBET switch 6 operated when setting the maximum number of medals among the specified number of medals (3 in this embodiment) determined according to the gaming state within the range. Settlement switch 10, which is operated when the medals used for setting the stored medals and the number of bets are settled (the medals used for setting the credits and the number of bets are returned), and which is operated when the game is started. The start switch 7, the reels 2L, 2C, and the 2R stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, which are operated when the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped, and the production switch 56, which is operated by the player during the production, can be operated by the player. It is provided in each.

In the following, the operation on the start switch 7 (for example, the operation of manually pressing the start switch 7) is referred to as the "start operation", and the operation on the stop switch for stopping the rotation of the first reel (for example, the stop switch is operated). The operation of pressing the stop switch by hand) is the "first stop operation", the operation of the stop switch for stopping the rotation of the second reel (for example, the operation of pressing the stop switch by hand) is the "second stop operation", and An operation on the stop switch for stopping the rotation of the third reel (for example, an operation of manually pressing the stop switch) is also referred to as a "third stop operation". In addition, the release of the press on the first stop switch (first stop operation) (for example, releasing the hand from the stop switch) is "first stop release", and the press on the second stop switch (second stop). The release of the operation) (that is, releasing the hand from the stop switch) is the "second stop release", and the pressing of the third stop switch (the third stop operation) is released (that is, the stop switch). (Release your hand from) is also referred to as "third stop release".

In front of the slot machine 1, a liquid crystal display 51 is provided above the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, and a bonus lamp 26 as an example of the advantageous suggestion display means is provided above the liquid crystal display 51. Side lamps 27 composed of a plurality of LEDs are provided on the left and right sides of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. Further, in the vicinity of the reels 2L, 2C and 2R, the reels 2L, 2C and 2R are provided corresponding to each of the reels, and the reels 2L, 2C and 2R are each irradiated with light from the back side or the side of the reel. Backlights 28L, 28C, 28C (hereinafter, also simply referred to as "reel backlight 28") are provided. Further, speakers 53 and 54 for outputting sound are provided on the left and right sides of the bonus lamp 26.

Further, on the front of the slot machine 1, as shown in FIG. 1, a credit display 11 displaying the number of medals stored as credits, the number of medals paid out due to the occurrence of a prize, and the contents when an error occurs. Game auxiliary display 12, which displays an error code indicating that the number of bets is 1, 1BETLED14 which notifies by lighting that the number of bets is set to 1, 2BETLED15 which notifies by lighting that the number of bets is set to 2, 3 3BETLED16 that notifies by lighting that it is set, insertion request LED17 that notifies by lighting that a medal can be inserted, and start that notifies by lighting that the game start operation by operating the start switch 7 is effective. A game display unit 13 is provided with an effective LED 18, an advantageous section LED 19 that notifies by lighting that the control is in an advantageous section, and a replay LED 20 that notifies that a replay game is in progress by lighting.

[Internal configuration of slot machine 1]
FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an internal configuration of the slot machine 1. As shown in FIG. 2, inside the MAXBET switch 6, a BET switch effective LED 21 for notifying by lighting that the betting number setting operation by the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 is effective is provided, and the stop switch 8L, Inside the 8C and 8R, left, middle and right stop effective LEDs 22L, 22C and 22R are provided to notify by lighting that the operation of stopping the reel by the corresponding stop switches 8L, 8C and 8R is effective. There is.

Inside the slot machine 1, there is a reset switch 23 that detects a reset operation to release the error state from the outside of the slot machine 1 by a predetermined key operation, and at that time while changing the set value or checking the set value. The hopper tank (not shown) side or the medal payout outlet 9 side, which will be described later, is provided inside the slot machine 1 for the flow path of medals inserted from the set value display 24 and the medal insertion unit 4 on which the set value is displayed. A medal selector having a flow path switching solenoid 30 for selectively switching to any one of the above, and a medal selector having inserted medal sensors 31a, 31b, and 31c for detecting medals inserted from the medal insertion unit 4 and flowing down to the hopper tank side is provided. ing.

Inside the slot machine 1, the above-mentioned reels 2L, 2C, 2R, reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R, and reel sensors 33L, 33C, 33R capable of detecting the reel reference positions of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, respectively, are formed. The reel unit, the hopper tank for storing medals inserted from the medal insertion unit 4, the hopper motor 34b for paying out the medals stored in the hopper tank from the medal payout outlet 9, and the medals paid out by driving the hopper motor 34b. A hopper unit including a payout sensor 34c for detecting the above is provided.

An overflow tank (not shown) for storing medals overflowing from the hopper tank is provided on the side of the hopper unit 34. Inside the overflow tank, a full tank sensor 35a for detecting that the stored medals are full is provided.

Further, inside the slot machine 1, it functions as a setting key switch 37 for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state, and a reset switch for canceling an error state in a normal state, and will be described later in the setting change state. A reset / setting switch 38 that functions as a setting switch for changing the set value of the winning probability (ball output rate) of the internal lottery is provided.

The setting key switch 37 and the reset / setting switch 38 are provided inside the slot machine 1 and cannot be operated unless the front door 1b, which can be opened by a predetermined key operation, is opened. Only the clerk who has the key can operate it. In particular, since the setting key switch 37 requires further key operation, only the clerk who has the key to operate the setting key switch 37 can be operated among the clerk of the game store. Further, the reset switch 23 does not need to open the front door 1b, but requires a key operation using a predetermined key, so that only a clerk who possesses the predetermined key can operate the reset switch 23.

Further, in a state where the game control board 40 is attached to a predetermined position inside the housing 1a inside the slot machine 1, a 7-segment display is displayed below the front side (player side) of the game control board 40. A game information display 50 composed of is arranged. In the game information display 50, the display contents can be visually recognized from the outside of the board case in a state where the game control board 40 is enclosed in a board case (not shown), and the game information display 50 is aggregated by the main control unit 41. Game information based on the game history in the slot machine 1 displayed on the game information display 50 (for example, the total number of medals paid out in a predetermined period is divided by the total number of medals used in the game in the period. The medal payout rate in the predetermined period calculated by the above, and the total number of games controlled in a state advantageous to the player (BB, advantageous section, etc. described later) in the predetermined period are calculated as the total number of games played in the period. A clerk or the like can recognize the ratio of the number of games controlled to an advantageous state in a predetermined period calculated by dividing by the total number of times.

As shown in FIG. 2, the slot machine 1 is provided with a game control board 40 and an effect control board 90. The game control board 40 controls the game, and the effect control board 90 responds to the game state. The production is controlled.

The game control board 40 includes the MAXBET switch 6, start switch 7, stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R, settlement switch 10, reset switch 23, input medal sensor 31a, 31b, 31c, reel sensor 33L, 33C, 33R, as described above. The payout sensor 34c, the full tank sensor 35a, the setting key switch 37, and the reset / setting switch 38 are connected, and the detection signals of these connected switches are input. Further, on the game control board 40, the above-mentioned credit display 11, game auxiliary display 12, 1-3 BETLED 14 to 16, input request LED 17, start effective LED 18, advantageous section LED 19, replaying LED 20, BET switch effective LED 21, left. , Middle, right stop effective LED 22L, 22C, 22R, set value display 24, flow path switching solenoid 30, reel motor 32L, 32C, 32R, hopper motor 34b, game information display 50 are connected, and these electrical parts Is driven based on the control of the main control unit 41 mounted on the game control board 40.

The game control board 40 is composed of a microcomputer provided with a main CPU 41a, a ROM 41b, a RAM 41c, and an I / O port 41d, and is equipped with a main control unit 41 that controls the game.

The main control unit 41 performs various controls for advancing the game in response to the detection of an operation accompanying the progress of the game, and transmits various commands to the sub control unit 91. The command transmitted from the main control unit 41 to the sub control unit 91 is sent in only one direction, and the command is not sent from the sub control unit 91 to the main control unit 41.

Further, as will be described later, the main control unit 41 repeatedly loops the processing according to the control state until the detection state of the various switches connected to the game control board 40 changes as the main processing, and the various switches Execute the process of gradual transition according to the change of the detection state. Further, the main control unit 41 executes the timer interrupt process at regular time intervals (about 0.56 milliseconds in this embodiment). The execution interval of the timer interrupt process is set to be longer than the total time of the time in which the process repeated according to the control state in the main process completes and the execution time of the timer interrupt process. The process that repeats according to the control state always completes at least one cycle with the next timer interrupt process.

The effect control board 90 is connected to a liquid crystal display 51 (see FIG. 1), speakers 53, 54, effect switch 56, bonus lamp 26, side lamp 27, and effect devices such as reel backlights 28L, 28c, and 28R. These effect devices are driven based on the control by the sub control unit 91 mounted on the effect control board 90. The sub control unit 91 can receive a command transmitted from the main control unit 41 and perform various controls for performing the effect.

[Set value]
The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment has a configuration in which the medal payout rate changes according to the set value. Specifically, the medal payout rate is changed by using the winning probability according to the set value in a lottery that affects the advantage to the player such as an internal lottery. The set value is composed of 6 stages from 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest payout rate, and the smaller the value in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 the lower the payout rate. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and the smaller the value in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is, the lower the advantage is.

In order to change the set value, it is necessary to turn on the power of the slot machine 1 after turning on the setting key switch 37. When the setting key switch 37 is turned on and the power is turned on, the setting value read from the RAM 41c is displayed as a display value on the setting value display 24, and the setting value can be changed by operating the reset / setting switch 38. Move to the changed state. When the reset / setting switch 38 is operated in the setting change state, the display value displayed on the setting value display 24 is updated by 1 (when the setting value 6 is further operated, the setting value is changed to 1). Return). Then, when the start switch 7 is operated, the display value is fixed as the set value. Then, when the setting key switch 37 is turned off, the confirmed display value (set value) is stored in the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41, and the game shifts to a state in which the game can proceed.

[Processing related to games]
In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, a specified number of bets that can be set according to the gaming state is determined, and the game is provided on the condition that the specified number of bets determined according to the gaming state is set. Can be started. In the present embodiment, the winning line LN is activated when a predetermined number of bets are set according to the gaming state.

The winning line is a line set to determine whether the combination of symbols displayed on the perspective windows 3 of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is a combination of winning symbols. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, only the winning line LN set across the symbols arranged horizontally in the middle stage of the reel 2L, the middle stage of the reel 2C, and the middle stage of the reel 2R, that is, the middle stage is awarded. It is defined as a line. In the present embodiment, only one winning line is applied, but a plurality of winning lines may be applied.

Then, in the present embodiment, when all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped, the activated winning line (in the case of this embodiment, the winning line LN is always activated, so that it is enabled in the following. The winning line LN is simply called the winning line), and a winning combination is obtained when a combination of symbols called roles is aligned. The combination may be a combination of the same symbols or a combination including different symbols.

When playing a game in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, first, a medal is inserted from the medal insertion unit 4, or a MAXBET switch 6 is operated to set a bet number using credits. When the specified number of bets determined according to the game state is set, the winning line LN (see FIG. 1) becomes valid, and the operation of the start switch 7 is valid, that is, the game can be started. Become. If more than the maximum number of medals are inserted out of the specified number corresponding to the gaming state, that amount will be added to the credit.

When the start switch 7 is operated (pressed by hand) while the game can be started, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are rotated, and the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are continuously changed. When any of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is operated (pressed by hand) while the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are being rotated, the rotation of the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is stopped, and the rotation of the corresponding reel is stopped. The design is derived and displayed on the perspective window 3 as a display result. The rotation of each reel 2L, 2C, and 2R is stopped on condition that the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are manually pressed, respectively. That is, after each stop switch is manually pressed, the rotation of each reel is stopped and the symbol is led out to the perspective window 3 even if the pressing is maintained without being released.

In the stop control, the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R corresponding to the operation is stopped within the maximum stop delay time (190 ms (millisecond) in this embodiment) from the time when the operation is performed for each stop switch. Is done. The reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are rotated 80 times per minute, and 80 (rotation) x 20 (the number of symbol frames per reel, for example, 20 frames) = 1600 frames of symbols are varied, so a predetermined maximum Until the stop delay time (190 ms) elapses, a maximum of four frames of symbols can be drawn in. That is, in the stop control, one symbol from the symbol displayed when the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are operated and the symbol up to 4 frames ahead, for a total of 5 frames (pull-in range). Can be selected and led to the reels 2L, 2R, 2R.

When all reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped, one game is completed, and a predetermined combination of symbols (hereinafter, also referred to as a combination) on the winning line LN is displayed on each reel 2L, 2C, and 2R. If the game is stopped as a result, a prize will be generated, and a number of medals determined according to the prize will be given to the player and added to the credit. Further, when the maximum number of credits (50 in the present embodiment) is reached, medals are directly paid out from the medal payout outlet 9 (see FIG. 1). Further, when the combination of symbols accompanying the transition of the gaming state stops on the winning line LN as the display result of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R, the combination of symbols is shifted to the gaming state according to the combination of symbols. ..

As described above, the rotation of each reel is stopped on the condition that each stop switch is manually pressed (that is, the third stop operation is performed), but the pressing is maintained. In this state, the winning determination process is not executed by the main control unit 41. The main control unit 41 performs the winning determination process on the condition that the third stop operation is performed and then the stop switch is released in the third stop operation (that is, the third stop release is performed). To execute. The main control unit 41 determines whether or not a prize has been generated according to the display result of each reel by executing the prize determination process, and gives the player a number of medals determined according to the prize. And give.

Further, when the main control unit 41 determines that a prize has been generated in the prize determination process, if the prize is a small winning combination, credits are added and medals are paid out based on the number of payouts according to the type of the small winning combination. In the case of a replay combination, a replay game flag that can specify the type of the replay combination is set in the RAM 41c to enable the replay game to be given.

Further, when the winning determination process is executed, the main control unit 41 transmits a winning determination command capable of specifying the type of the generated winning to the sub control unit 91. On the other hand, the sub-control unit 91 executes an effect of notifying the occurrence of a prize (a prize notification described later) based on the prize determination command.

Further, the main control unit 41 executes the game end processing after executing the winning determination processing. In the process at the end of the game, the main control unit 41 performs freeze control for delaying the progress of the game for a predetermined time, and transmits a freeze command to the effect of performing freeze control to the sub control unit 91. On the other hand, the sub control unit 91 controls the liquid crystal display 51, the speakers 53, 54, etc. according to the execution time of the freeze control executed on the main control unit 41 side based on the freeze command to execute the effect for freeze. To do.

In the present embodiment, the game starts when the operation of the start switch 7 is detected while the operation of the start switch 7 is valid, and the game ends when all the reels are stopped. In addition, one unit of control (game control) for executing the game starts when all the controls associated with the end of the previous game are completed, and when all the controls associated with the end of the game are completed. finish.

In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the types of winning combinations are determined according to the game state, and it is possible to start the next game without the need to set a small winning combination with a medal payout and a bet number. There is a replaying role accompanied by granting a replay game, and a special role accompanied by a transition to a gaming state (special state) that is advantageous to the player. In the following, the small role and the replay role are collectively referred to as the general role. In order for each winning combination determined according to the game state to be won, it is necessary to win the internal lottery and set the winning flag of the winning combination. The internal lottery is performed before the display results of all reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are derived (specifically, the start switch 7) whether or not the main control unit 41 allows the above-mentioned winning of each winning combination. It is determined by using a random number (at the time of detection).

Of the winning flags for each combination, the winning flags for the small combination and the replay combination are valid only in the game in which the flag is set, and are invalid in the next game, but the winning flag for the special combination is It is valid until the combinations of the allowed combinations are complete by the flag, and is invalid in the game in which the combinations of the allowed combinations are complete. That is, once the winning flag of the special combination is won, even if the combination of combinations allowed by the flag cannot be aligned, the winning flag is not invalidated and is carried over to the next game. It has become.

In the slot machine 1, a prize is generated when a predetermined combination of winning combinations of winning combinations is derived as a display result on the winning lines LN of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R at the end of one game. In addition, when the symbol combination of the special role (for example, "7-7-7") is stopped on the winning line LN, the special role is won and the special state is changed to BB (Big Bonus). Migrate.

The BB is a gaming state that is continuously controlled by the RB until a predetermined end condition (in the present embodiment, the number of medals paid out exceeds 296) is satisfied. The RB is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than other gaming states by increasing the probability of winning a small winning combination in the internal lottery, and when a predetermined number of games are exhausted during the RB, or This is a gaming state in which when a predetermined type of combination (any type is acceptable) wins a predetermined number of times, the game ends at the earlier of the two. In the RB controlled during the BB, the special winning combination and the replaying combination are excluded from the lottery in the internal lottery, so that the winning probability of the small winning combination is higher than that in the state where the BB (RB) does not control the winning combination. It is a probability, and the payout rate of medals per game exceeds 100%.

In the slot machine 1, a general combination (hereinafter referred to as a duplicate winning combination) that is won in duplicate with the special combination is provided in the internal lottery, and if the duplicate winning combination is won in the internal lottery, The special role can also be won in duplicate, and there is a possibility that the special role has been won by stopping the symbol combinations that make up the duplicate winning combination on reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. It has come to be suggested.

Further, in the internal lottery, when the stop operation is performed in a predetermined operation mode (for example, stop operation order, operation timing), it is more advantageous than when the stop operation is performed in another operation mode. A combination and a replaying combination (hereinafter, may be referred to as an AT target combination) can be won. The AT target combination includes, for example, a combination that is more advantageous than the stop mode in which the stop operation is performed in a predetermined operation mode and the stop operation is performed in another operation mode. This includes a combination in which, when the stop operation is performed in a predetermined operation mode, the rate of stopping the advantageous stop mode is higher than that in the case where the stop operation is performed in another operation mode. Further, the advantageous stop mode includes not only a stop mode accompanied by the awarding of medals, but also a stop mode accompanied by a transition to an advantageous gaming state, a stop mode in which a transition to an unfavorable gaming state is avoided, and the like.

The main control unit 41 has a notification period during which navigation notification can be executed, in which the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, which is advantageous for the player according to the result of the internal lottery, is notified by the lighting mode of the game auxiliary display 12. It can be controlled by the assist time (AT). When the predetermined lottery conditions are satisfied, the main control unit 41 performs an advantageous section lottery to determine whether or not to control the advantageous section controlled in an advantageous state for the player, and the advantageous section is drawn. By winning the lottery, the control of the advantageous section is started from the end of the game in which the lottery conditions for performing the advantageous section lottery are satisfied. In the advantageous section, the main control unit 41 controls the AT by winning the navigation target combination (pushing order combination) according to the game state, thereby executing the navigation notification, which is advantageous for the player. The operation modes (for example, push order, operation timing, etc.) of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are notified by using the game auxiliary display 12, and commands that can specify the operation modes that are advantageous to the player are sub-controlled. By transmitting to the unit 91, a navigation effect for notifying the operation mode by using a liquid crystal display 51 or the like is executed. The push order combination corresponds to a push order bell in which the bell wins when the operation mode of the player matches the operation mode corresponding to the winning push order combination, and a push order combination in which the player's operation mode is won. A push order replay in which the replay wins when the operation mode is matched is included. By operating the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R in the operation mode notified by the navigation notification and the navigation effect, the push order winning combination won in the internal lottery can be reliably won. Further, in the control of the advantageous section, the advantageous section LED 19 is turned on to notify that the advantageous section is being controlled.

[Regarding the control of the display mode of the game auxiliary display 12 and the like by the main control unit 41]
Next, the control of the display modes of the display devices such as the game auxiliary display 12 and the LEDs such as 1 to 3 BET LEDs 14 to 16 performed by the main control unit 41 will be described with reference to FIGS. 3 to 6.

The I / O port 41d provided in the main control unit 41 outputs a light emission signal for controlling the light emission mode to each device of the display and the LED connected to the game control board 40 as described later. Examples of the output port include a first output port 61, a second output port 62, a third output port 63, and the like. Each output port of the first output port 61, the second output port 62, and the third output port 63 is composed of eight output terminals, and the predetermined output terminals are used to emit light of indicators and LEDs, which will be described later. A signal line of a light emitting signal or a selection signal for causing the unit to emit light is connected.

FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining display contents of various indicators controlled by the main control unit 41, output ports to which LEDs are connected, various indicators, and the like. As shown in FIG. 3, among the output ports, the first output port 61 and the third output port 63 have a credit display 11, a game auxiliary display 12, a set value display 24, 1 to 3 BETLEDs 14 to 16, and input requests. The LED 17, the start effective LED 18, the advantageous section LED 19, and the replaying LED 20 are connected, and the game information display 50 is connected to the second output port 62 and the third output port 63 of the output ports.

The credit display 11 is composed of two 7-segment displays and can display two-digit numbers and symbols, and each 7-segment display can display numbers (for example, "1") and symbols (for example, "1"). -”, Etc.) can be displayed to indicate that the credit value or setting is being changed.

The game auxiliary display 12 is composed of two 7-segment displays and can display 2-digit numbers, symbols, alphabets, etc., and each 7-segment display can display numbers (for example, "1") and symbols (for example, "1"). For example, by displaying "-") and alphabetic characters (for example, "E", "r", etc.), the value of the number of medals to be paid out in connection with the winning of the small winning combination, and the fact that the setting is being changed. It is possible to display an error code indicating the content of the error that has occurred, and a navigation notification indicating the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R that are advantageous for the player.

The set value display 24 is composed of one 7-segment display and can display a one-digit number or the like. By displaying a number (for example, "1") on the 7-segment display, the slot machine The set value set to 1 can be displayed.

The 1st to 3rd BETLEDs 14 to 16 are each composed of one LED, and when the 1BETLED14 lights up, it notifies that the first bet number is set, and when the 2BETLED15 lights up, the second one. Notifies that the bet number is set, and notifies that the third bet number is set by lighting the 3BETLED16.

The insertion request LED is composed of one LED, and when the insertion request LED lights up, the medal insertion unit 4 notifies that the medal can be inserted.

The start effective LED 18 is composed of one LED, and by turning on the start effective LED 18, a specified number of bets required to start the game is set, and the operation reception of the start switch 7 is effective. Notify that it is.

The advantageous section LED 19 is composed of one LED, and when the advantageous section LED 19 is turned on, it notifies that the advantageous section is controlled.

The game information display 50 is composed of four 7-segment displays and can display two sets of 2-digit numbers, symbols, letters, etc., and each 7-segment display can display numbers (for example, "1"). By displaying alphabetic characters (for example, "A"), it is possible to display an abbreviation indicating the type of game information based on the game history, a payout rate, a ratio, and the like.

The main control unit 41 advances the game by the above-mentioned main process, and every time a predetermined display switching condition is satisfied, the data of information about the game set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c (for example, credit). And, based on the number of payouts, etc.), display data (8-bit data for bit control (for example, "00000001")) for displaying information on the game on the above-mentioned various indicators and LEDs is created. Therefore, it is set in the output buffer provided for each output port in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c. After that, the main control unit 41 performs bit control described later in the timer interrupt process to perform a predetermined light emitting unit in a predetermined display or the like specified based on the display data set in the output buffer. The light emitting signal and the selection signal, which are controlled to the light emitting mode or the non-light emitting mode, are controlled to be output from a predetermined output port. As a result, information on the game according to the progress of the game is displayed and notified by a predetermined display device or the like.

For example, as shown in FIGS. 4 to 6, the main control unit 41 is set in the slot machine 1 in a setting change state in which the set value can be changed by an operation of a store clerk in which the slot machine 1 is installed. A player can use a medal set in the credit or bet number according to the setting confirmation state for displaying the set value, the error state in which the progress of the game is disabled due to the occurrence of an error, and the operation of the settlement switch 10 of the player or the like. Every time a predetermined display switching condition is satisfied according to the settlement state, during the game, during the game (during non-game), etc., the display data is created and output based on the information data related to the game. By setting it in the buffer, it is controlled to display information about the game on a predetermined display or the like.

FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining display modes of various indicators in various control states controlled by the main control unit 41. As shown in FIG. 4A, the main control unit 41 starts the setting change state by turning on the power of the slot machine 1 with the setting key switch 37 turned on, and performs the main process. Creates display data for displaying "-" on each of the 7-segment displays of the credit display 11 and the game auxiliary display 12, and of the output port to which the credit display 11 and the game auxiliary display 12 are connected. Set in the output buffer. Further, for display, the setting value set in the slot machine 1 is specified by any of "1" to "6" by referring to the predetermined area of the RAM 41c by the main processing, and the value of the set value is displayed. Create data and set it in the output buffer of the output port to which the setting value display 24 is connected. Then, by performing bit control in the timer interrupt process, "−−" is displayed on the credit display 11 and the game auxiliary display 12, and the set value display 24 is displayed with a number indicating the set value. By displaying "---" on the credit display 11 and the game auxiliary display 12, it is notified that the setting has been changed, and by displaying a number on the setting value display 24, the selectable setting value can be set. Notify.

In the setting change state, as a display switching condition, it is detected that the start switch 7 is in the ON state, so that the credit display 11 and the game auxiliary display 12 display "---" in the main process. Create data, set it in the output buffer of the credit display 11 and the game auxiliary display 12, create display data to display "0" on the set value display 24, and output the set value display 24. Set in the buffer. Then, by performing bit control in the timer interrupt process, the display mode of the credit display 11 and the game auxiliary display 12 is continued as "---", and the display of the set value display 24 is changed to "0". Switch. By switching the display of the set value display 24 to "0", the start switch 7 is operated to notify that a new set value has been set.

After that, as a display switching condition, the setting key switch 37 is turned off, so that the main control unit 41 displays "_0" ("_" is a light-off mode (non-display mode)) as a credit by the main process. Data is created and set in the output buffer of the output port to which the credit display 11 is connected. In addition, display data for turning off the game auxiliary display 12 and the set value display 24 is created and set in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 and the set value display 24. Then, by performing bit control in the timer interrupt process, "_0" is displayed on the credit display 11, and the game auxiliary display 12 and the set value display 24 are controlled to be turned off. By switching the display mode of the credit display 11 and the game auxiliary display 12 to a display mode other than "---" and setting the display mode of the set value display 24 to the extinguishing mode, the setting change state is terminated. Notify.

In the setting change state, the main control unit 41 does not update the display data set in the output buffers of 1-3 BETLEDs 14 to 16, input request LEDs 17, start effective LEDs 18, advantageous section LEDs 19, and replaying LEDs 20. Keep in. At the start of the setting change state, display data to be turned off is set in the display buffer of these LEDs, and these LEDs are controlled to the off state during the setting change state. ing.

As shown in FIG. 4B, the main control unit 41 starts the setting confirmation state by turning on the setting key switch 37 during the non-game in which the game is not performed, and by the main process. By referring to the predetermined area of the RAM 41c, specifying which of "1" to "6" the set value set in the slot machine 1 is, and creating display data for displaying the value of the set value. , Set value Set in the output buffer of the output port to which the display 24 is connected. Then, by performing bit control in the timer interrupt process, the set value display 24 is displayed with a number indicating the set value, and the set set value is notified.

After that, as a display switching condition, when the setting key switch 37 is turned off, the main control unit 41 creates display data for turning off the setting value display 24 and puts it in the output buffer of the setting value display 24. Set. Then, by performing bit control in the timer interrupt process, the set value display 24 is controlled in a light-off mode to notify that the setting change state has been completed.

In the setting confirmation state, the main control unit 41 maintains the display data set in the output buffers of the credit display 11 and the game auxiliary display 12 without updating. At the start of the setting confirmation state, display data indicating the credit value is set in the output buffer of the credit display 11, and the display mode of the credit display 11 is the credit value ("" It is controlled by any number from _0 "to" 50 "). Further, in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12, display data is set so that the light is turned off when the medal has not been paid out in the previous game, and when the medal has been paid out in the previous game, the display data is set. Display data for displaying the number of payouts is set, and display data for turning off the light when the previous game was the last game in the BB is set, and the game auxiliary display 12 is in the setting confirmation state. The display mode of is controlled to the display mode according to the situation of the previous game.

Further, during the setting confirmation state, the main control unit 41 does not update the display data set in the output buffers of 1-3 BETLEDs 14 to 16, ON request LEDs 17, start effective LEDs 18, advantageous section LEDs 19, and replaying LEDs 20. Keep in. At the start of the setting confirmation state, display data indicating the display mode according to the status of the previous game is set in the display buffer of these LEDs, and these LEDs are in the setting change state. The display mode is controlled according to the situation of the previous game.

As shown in FIG. 4C, the main control unit 41 controls the error state when an error occurs so as to disable the progress of the game. At the start of the error state, the display data set in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 by the main process is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c and saved. At the start of the error state, the display mode of the game auxiliary display 12 is the same as the display mode of the game auxiliary display 12 in the setting confirmation state, which indicates the number of medals to be paid out according to the previous game situation. Or it is off.

After that, the type of the error occurring is specified by referring to the predetermined area of the RAM 41c, display data for displaying the error code indicating the error occurring is created, and the game auxiliary display 12 is connected. Set in the output buffer of the existing output port. Then, by performing bit control in the timer interrupt processing, an alphabetic character and a number indicating an error code are displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 (in the present embodiment, an "E" indicating an error code and a number "1" indicating an error type are displayed. ~ "Any number of" 8 ") is displayed to notify the type of error occurring.

After that, as a display switching condition, a reset operation is performed by operating the reset switch 23 or the reset / setting switch 38, so that the display data saved at the start of the error state is specified by referring to the predetermined area of the RAM 41c. The display data is set in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12, and the error state is terminated. Then, by performing bit control in the timer interrupt process, the display mode of the game auxiliary display 12 is controlled based on the display data of the output buffer, and the game auxiliary display is set to the display mode before the error state is started. Twelve display modes are controlled.

In the error state, the main control unit 41 maintains the display data set in the output buffer of the credit display 11 without updating as in the above-mentioned setting confirmation state. In the error state, the display mode of the credit display 11 is controlled by the credit value (a number from "_0" to "50").

Further, in the error state, the main control unit 41 does not update the display data set in the output buffers of 1-3 BETLEDs 14 to 16, ON request LEDs 17, start effective LEDs 18, advantageous section LEDs 19, and replaying LEDs 20. maintain. At the start of the error state, display data indicating the display mode according to the situation of the previous game is set in the display buffer of these LEDs, and in the error state, these LEDs are set to the previous display mode. The display mode is controlled according to the situation of the game.

As shown in FIG. 4 (d), the main control unit 41 pays out the medals stored in the credits by operating the settlement switch 10 to ON during the non-game during non-game. Starting the settlement state to be returned from 9, create display data to display the value calculated by subtracting the credit value displayed on the game assistance display 12 by 1 by the main process, and play assistance. The process of setting the output buffer of the output port to which the display 12 is connected and waiting until at least one timer interrupt process is performed is sequentially performed until the display mode of the game auxiliary display 12 becomes "0". Repeat.

Then, by performing bit control in the timer interrupt process during the execution of the settlement process, the credit value displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 is sequentially subtracted one by one, and finally "0" is displayed. Then, it notifies that the settlement process has been performed.

In the settlement state, the main control unit 41 maintains the display data set in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 without updating as in the above-mentioned setting confirmation state. In the settlement state, the display mode of the game auxiliary display 12 is controlled to the display mode according to the situation of the previous game.

Further, at the start of the settlement state, the main control unit 41 turns off these LEDs in the output buffers of 1-3 BETLEDs 14 to 16, turn-on request LEDs 17, start effective LEDs 18, advantageous section LEDs 19, and replaying LEDs 20. Display data is set and these LEDs are controlled to be turned off.

Next, indicators such as the game auxiliary display 12 performed by the main control unit 41 in a predetermined game different from the last game in the BB (a game other than the last game in the BB and a game in a normal state not controlled by the BB). And control of the display mode of LEDs such as 1-3 BETLEDs 14 to 16 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a diagram for explaining control of display modes of various indicators and LEDs in a predetermined game.

One game is started by operating the start switch 7 in the ON state with the specified number of bets set and the operation reception by the start switch 7 enabled, and all reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are operated. After being rotated in a predetermined constant speed state, the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are operated to stop the rotation of all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, and the process is terminated. Then, when the rotation of all reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is stopped, if the symbol combination of the small winning combination is stopped at the winning line LN, the winning of the small winning combination occurs and a predetermined number of medals. Is paid out from the medal payout exit 9. After that, the game end initialization process for initializing the predetermined area to be initialized for each game in the storage area of the RAM 41c is performed, and the control of one game is ended. After that, the medal is inserted from the medal insertion unit 4 or the MAXBET switch 6 is operated to control the setting of the bet number, and when the specified number of bets is set, the operation by the start switch 7 is performed. Reception is activated. Then, while the operation reception is enabled, the control of the next game is started by operating the start switch 7. When a predetermined display switching condition is satisfied according to the progress of such a game, the main control unit 41 is used as an output buffer for indicators such as the game auxiliary display 12 and LEDs such as 1 to 3 BETLEDs 14 to 16. By setting a predetermined display data, it is controlled to a predetermined display mode.

As shown in FIG. 5, when the start switch 7 is turned ON at the start of the game, that is, when the specified number of bets is set, the credit indicators 11, 1 to 3 BETLEDs 14 to 16, the advantageous section LED19, As for each display data of the LED 20 during replay, the data set at the end of the previous game or after the end of the previous game is maintained in each corresponding output buffer, and the display mode is continued. On the other hand, the display data of the game auxiliary display 12 is advantageous to the player according to the AT target combination when the game is a game in the advantageous section and the AT target combination is won by the internal lottery. Display data for displaying a navigation notification that can identify the operation mode (stop order, stop timing, etc.) of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is set in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12, and the game auxiliary display When the display mode of the device 12 is controlled to the navigation notification display and the game is not a game in the advantageous section, or when the AT target combination is not won, the display data controlled to the light-off mode is the game auxiliary display. The game auxiliary display 12 is controlled to be turned off by being set in the output buffer of the device 12. Further, as for the display data of the ON request LED 17 and the start effective LED 18, the display data controlled in the extinguishing mode is set in the output buffer of each LED, and the ON request LED 17 and the start effective LED 18 are controlled to be in the extinguished state.

After one game is started and all reels 2L, 2C and 2R are rotated in a predetermined constant speed state, the stop switches 8L, 8C and 8R are operated to stop the rotation of all reels 2L, 2C and 2R. In the period until this is done, the display data of the display such as the credit display 11 and the display data of the LEDs such as 1 to 3 BETLEDs 14 to 16 are not updated, and the display mode of these displays and the like is maintained.

Then, when all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped, the display data of the credit display 11, the game auxiliary display 12, the advantageous section LED 19, and the replaying LED 20 can be updated.

When the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped, the symbol combination of the small winning combination is stopped on the winning line LN, and when the medal is paid out, the display data of the credit display 11 is the maximum value of the credit. (In this embodiment, the number of medals to be paid out is updated by 1 in the range up to "50"), and the medals are sequentially set in the output buffer of the credit display 11, and the display mode of the credit display 11 is set. Is updated to be the credit value after adding the number of payouts. On the other hand, when the symbol combination of the replaying combination is stopped on the winning line LN, or when the symbol combination constituting any combination is not stopped on the winning line LN and the medal is not paid out. , The display data of the credit display 11 is not updated, and the display mode of the credit display 11 is maintained.

Further, when medals are paid out, the display data of the game auxiliary display 12 is updated so as to be added one by one up to a value indicating the number of medals paid out, and the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 is added. Is sequentially set to, and the display mode of the game auxiliary display 12 is updated to be a value indicating the number of payouts. On the other hand, when the medal is not paid out, the display data for controlling the extinguishing mode is set in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12, and the game auxiliary display 12 is controlled to be in the extinguished state.

Further, when the medal is paid out, the display data of the insertion request LED 17 is the display data that controls the lighting mode after the update of the display data of the credit display 11 and the game auxiliary display 12 is completed. It is set in the output buffer of the closing request LED 17, and the closing request LED 17 is controlled to be lit. Further, when the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped, if the symbol combination constituting any combination on the winning line LN is not stopped and is out of order, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped and one. When the game is completed, the display data for controlling the lighting mode is set in the output buffer of the input request LED 17 as the display data of the input request LED 17, and the input request LED 17 is controlled to be in the lighting state. On the other hand, when the symbol combination of the replay combination is stopped on the winning line LN when the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped, the display data in the output buffer of the input request LED 17 is not updated. The display data controlled in the extinguishing mode is maintained as it is, and the input request LED 17 is maintained in the extinguished state.

Further, when the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped, the symbol combination of the replay combination is stopped on the winning line LN, and when the replay is given, it lights up as the display data of the LED 20 during replay. The display data to be controlled according to the mode is set in the output buffer of the LED 20 during replay, and the LED 20 during replay is controlled to be lit. Further, as the display data of the start effective LED 18, the display data for controlling the lighting mode is set in the output buffer of the start effective LED 18, and the start effective LED 18 is controlled to be in the lighting state. On the other hand, when the replay is not given, the display data for controlling the extinguishing mode is set in the output buffer of the replaying LED20 as the display data of the replaying LED20, and the replaying LED20 is controlled to be in the extinguished state. To.

Further, when it is determined that the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are controlled in the advantageous section when the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped, or in the advantageous section, the lighting mode is controlled as the display data of the advantageous section LED19. The display data is set in the output buffer of the advantageous section LED 19, and the advantageous section LED 19 is controlled to be lit. On the other hand, when it is not determined to control the advantageous section or when it is not in the advantageous section, the display data controlled in the extinguishing mode is set in the output buffer of the advantageous section LED19 as the display data of the advantageous section LED19. Then, the advantageous section LED 19 is controlled to be turned off.

The main control unit 41 stops the rotation of all reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, performs processing related to paying medals and granting re-games according to the result of the game, and then executes initialization processing at the end of the game. Therefore, in the storage area of the RAM 41c, a predetermined area to be initialized for each game is initialized. At this time, the predetermined area to be initialized includes a storage area such as game data related to the game, for example, data related to the game that is the basis for creating the lottery result of the internal lottery and the data for displaying the number of payouts. These data are initialized by the initialization process at the end of the game and are erased from the predetermined area of the RAM 41c. Further, the predetermined area initialized by the game end initialization process does not include the output buffers of various indicators and LEDs, and even after the game end initialization process is executed, the various indicators The display mode of the LEDs and the LEDs is maintained based on the display data set in each output buffer.

The predetermined area of the RAM 41c including each output buffer is backed up by the backup power supply so that the stored contents are retained as long as the backup power supply is supplied even when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped. When the slot machine 1 recovers from the power failure, the display data at the time of the power failure can be recovered in the state set in each output buffer.

When the rotation of all reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is stopped in the game, and the re-game is not granted in the previous game during the non-game after the payout process and the initialization process at the end of the game are completed. Maintains the display mode of 1-3 BETLEDs 14 to 16 in the display mode at the end of the previous game until the medal is inserted from the medal insertion unit 4 or the operation of setting the bet number is performed by operating the MAXBET switch 6. While waiting, if a re-game is granted in the previous game, the display mode of various indicators and LEDs is maintained in the display mode at the end of the previous game until the start switch 7 is operated. Wait while doing.

During non-game, when medals are inserted from the medal insertion unit 4 and the first medal is set as the bet number, display data for controlling the extinguishing mode is stored in the output buffers of 1-3 BETLEDs 14 to 16. Set. After that, display data for controlling the lighting mode is set in the output buffer of the 1BETLED 14, and the 1BETLED 14 is controlled to be in the lighting state. After that, every time the second and third medals are set as the number of bets, display data for controlling the lighting mode is set in the output buffers of the 2BETLED15 and 3BETLED16, and these LEDs are controlled to be in the lighting state. Will be done.

Further, in the non-game, when the bet number is set by operating the MAXBET switch 6, the display data of the credit display 11 is the number of medals required to set the specified number of bets from the credit. The data is updated to display the value after subtraction, and the display mode of the credit display 11 is controlled to the value after setting a predetermined number of bets (not shown).

Further, during non-game, when three medals are set as the number of bets, display data for controlling the lighting mode is set in the output buffer of the start valid LED 18, and the start valid LED 18 is turned on. Be controlled.

As described above, in the predetermined game (the game other than the last game in the BB and the game in the normal state not controlled by the BB), when the medal is paid out when the game is completed, the game auxiliary display 12 The display mode of is controlled to display the number of medals to be paid out, and then the start switch 7 is operated with a predetermined number of bets set in order to start the next game, thereby assisting the game. By controlling the display mode of the display 12 to the off state or the navigation notification display, the display of the number of medals to be paid out is terminated.

Further, the display modes of 1 to 3 BETLEDs 14 to 16 are controlled to the lit state when the bet number is set to start the game, that is, the lit state is controlled before the game is finished. It remains lit even after the end of the game. Then, the display mode of 1-3 BETLEDs 14 to 16 is once set by setting the bet number for starting the next game by inserting medals from the medal insertion unit 4 or operating the MAXBET switch 6. It is controlled to be turned off, and the notification of the bet number setting of the previous game is terminated. Then, the display modes of 1 to 3 BETLEDs 14 to 16 are controlled to be lit according to the number of bets set to start the next game.

Next, control of display modes such as the game auxiliary display 12 and LEDs such as 1 to 3 BET LEDs 14 to 16 performed by the main control unit 41 in the final game in the BB will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining control of display modes of various indicators and LEDs in the final game in BB. It should be noted that the control of the display mode of the display mode in the last game in the BB includes the same configuration as the control of the display mode of the display mode in the predetermined game different from the above-mentioned last game in the BB. , The differences will be mainly explained below.

As shown in FIG. 6, the main control unit 41 does not control the AT when the BB is being controlled, and in the final game in the BB, the start switch 7 is used to start the game. When is operated, the game auxiliary display 12 is turned off by setting the display data for controlling the off state as the display data of the game auxiliary display 12 in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12. It is designed to be controlled by the state.

Further, after starting the control of the BB, the main control unit 41 totals the total number of medals to be paid out in the BB to be paid out with the winning of the small winning combination at the end of each game, and the total payout of the medals in the BB. It is determined whether or not the number of medals exceeds a predetermined predetermined number of medals (296 in the present embodiment). Then, when it is determined that the total number of medals to be paid out in the BB exceeds the predetermined number, the game is specified as the last game in the BB, and the initialization process at the end of the game at the end of the game is executed. After that, when the BB ends, a unique BB end time process is performed to end the BB control. The game end initialization process and the BB end process are processes included in the above-mentioned game end process.

In the BB end time processing, after performing freeze control for delaying the progress of the game for a predetermined time, the initialization target area in the RAM 41c is initialized based on the BB end time initialization table. Perform initialization processing.

Since the main control unit 41 performs freeze control at the end of the BB, the sub control unit 91 uses an effect device such as a liquid crystal display 51 to BB at a predetermined time in which the progress of the game is delayed by the freeze control. (For example, an effect suggesting the end of the BB, an effect of notifying the game history such as the number of medals paid out in the BB, etc.) can be performed.

The output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 and the output buffers of 1-3 BETLEDs 14 to 16 are set in the initialization target area of the RAM 41c, which is initialized based on the initialization table at the end of BB by the initialization process at the end of BB. The area is included, and the display data of the game auxiliary display 12 and the display data of 1 to 3 BETLEDs 14 to 16 are initialized by performing the initialization process at the end of BB. After that, bit control is performed by the timer interrupt process, based on the display data of the game auxiliary display 12 in the initialized state and the display data of the 1 to 3 BETLEDs 14 to 16 in the initialized state. The display modes of the game auxiliary indicators 12 and 1 to 3 BETLEDs 14 to 16 are controlled to be turned off.

As shown in FIG. 6, by performing the BB end time initialization process in the BB end time processing, at the end of the last game in the BB, the display in each output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 and 1 to 3 BETLEDs 14 to 16 The game auxiliary display 12 and 1 to 3 BETLEDs 14 to 16 are controlled to be in the off state by initializing the data for display and updating the display and the LED to display data for controlling the lighting mode.

On the other hand, at the end of the last game in BB, the display data in each output buffer such as the credit display 11, the start effective LED18, the advantageous section LED19, and the replaying LED20 are not initialized, and at the end of the game. The display mode of is maintained even after the end of BB. In the BB end processing, before the BB end initialization process is performed, the display data such as the credit display 11, the start valid LED 18, the advantageous section LED 19, and the replaying LED 20 are initialized by the BB end initialization process. It is saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c that is not converted, and after the initialization process at the end of BB is completed, the saved display data is stored in the credit display 11, the start effective LED18, the advantageous section LED19, the replaying LED20, and the like. By returning to the output buffer, the display mode at the end of the last game of the BB may be maintained even after the end of the BB.

As described above, in the final game in the BB, when the medals are paid out at the end of the game, the display mode of the game auxiliary display 12 is controlled to display the number of medals paid out. To. After that, when the control of the BB is terminated, the initialization process at the end of the BB is performed, the game auxiliary display 12 is controlled to the off state, and the display of the number of medals to be paid out is terminated, so that the above-mentioned predetermined game is completed. After the end of (a game other than the last game in BB and a game in a normal state not controlled by BB), the timing to end the display of the number of medals to be paid out (the start switch 7 is set with the specified number of bets set). It is possible to end the display of the number of medals to be paid out at a timing different from (when the operation is turned ON).

Further, by including the RAM area of the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 in the initialization table used for the initialization process at the end of BB, the game auxiliary display is performed by the initialization process at the end of BB after the last game in BB. Since the display data of the device 12 is initialized and the display mode of the game auxiliary display 12 is controlled to the off state, the BB has a difference in the timing at which the notification of the number of payouts by the game auxiliary display 12 is completed. In order to specify whether it is the last game or the predetermined game, it is not necessary to perform a process separate from the BB end time initialization process at the end of the last game in the BB.

In the last game in the BB, the display modes 1-3BETLEDs 14-16 are controlled to be lit when the bet number is set to start the game, i.e., before the last game in the BB is finished. It is controlled to be in the lit state, and is maintained in the lit state even after the end of the game. After that, when the control of the BB is terminated, the initialization process at the end of the BB is performed to control the 1-3 BETLEDs 14 to 16 to the off state, and the notification of the number of bets set in the game is terminated. After the above-mentioned predetermined game (a game other than the last game in the BB and a game in a normal state not controlled by the BB) is completed, the timing for ending the notification of the set bet number (medals are inserted from the medal insertion unit 4). Alternatively, the notification of the set bet number can be terminated at a timing different from (when the bet number is set by operating the MAXBET switch 6).

Further, by including the RAM area of the output buffers of 1-3BETLED14 to 16 in the initialization table used for the initialization process at the end of BB, after the last game in BB, the initialization process at the end of BB causes 1-3BETLED14. Since the display data of ~ 16 is initialized and the display mode of the 1st to 3rd BETLEDs 14 to 16 is controlled to the off state, the difference in the timing at which the notification of the set number of bets by the 1st to 3rd BETLEDs 14 to 16 is completed , In order to specify whether it is the last game in the BB or the predetermined game, it is not necessary to perform a process separate from the initialization process at the end of the BB at the end of the last game in the BB. ..

The RAM area of the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 and the RAM area of the output buffers of 1-3 BETLEDs 14 to 16 that are initialized by the initialization process at the end of the game are the RAM areas that are initialized by the initialization process at the end of the game. It may be configured to be continuous with, or it may be configured not to be continuous with the RAM area initialized by the initialization process at the end of the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, after the end of the last game in the BB, after the initialization process at the end of the game, the initialization process at the end of the BB is performed, and the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 is performed based on the initialization table. The RAM area and the RAM area of the output buffers of 1 to 3 BETLEDs 14 to 16 are initialized, but the RAM area of the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 and the RAM area of the output buffers of 1 to 3 BETLEDs 14 to 16 are set at the end of the game. Set to an area continuous with the predetermined area initialized by the initialization process, and in the game end initialization process at the end of the last game in the BB, for example, the RAM area of the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 and Areas between these addresses are specified by designating the start and end addresses of a series of areas including the RAM area of the output buffers of 1-3 BETLEDs 14 to 16 and the predetermined area initialized by the game end initialization process. By initializing all at once, after the end of the last game in the BB, the RAM area of the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 and the RAM area of the output buffers of 1-3 BETLEDs 14 to 16 are initialized to display the game auxiliary display. The device 12 and 1 to 3 BETLEDs 14 to 16 may be controlled to be turned off.

In the above-described example, the main control unit 41 has a configuration in which the game state can be controlled to a normal state not controlled by the BB and a state controlled by the BB, and the last game in the BB is set as a predetermined state. After the end, when the game auxiliary display 12 notifies the number of medals to be paid out as information about the game, the game auxiliary display 12 is established as the first condition that the control of the BB is terminated. After the notification of information about the game by BB is terminated and a predetermined game different from the last game in the BB in the predetermined state (a game in a normal state not controlled by the BB or a game other than the last game in the BB) is completed. , When the game auxiliary display 12 is notified of the number of medals to be paid out as information about the game, the second condition (effective operation of the start switch 7 for starting the game) different from the first condition is performed. ) Is satisfied, the notification of information about the game by the game auxiliary display 12 is terminated.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 7, the main control unit 41 controls the game state to be a normal state not controlled by the BB and the CB, a state controlled by the BB, and a state controlled by the CB. This is a possible configuration, and when the game auxiliary display 12 notifies the number of medals to be paid out as information about the game after the last game in the BB is completed as the first predetermined state, the first condition is the BB. When it is established that the control is terminated, the notification of the game-related information by the game auxiliary display 12 is terminated, and after the last game in the CB is completed as the second predetermined state, the game is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12. When the number of medals to be paid out is notified as information about the game, the game is performed by satisfying the second condition (effective operation of the start switch 7 for starting the game) different from the first condition. The auxiliary display 12 may be configured to end the notification of information about the game.

FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining control of various display modes and LED display modes in the final game in CB for a modified example. The main control unit 41 sets the BB and each game in a predetermined state different from the BB until a predetermined end condition (in the present embodiment, the number of medals to be paid out in the CB is equal to or more than the predetermined number) is satisfied. It is possible to control the CB, which is continuously controlled by the CT, in which all the small wins are allowed to win in the internal lottery, but the attraction is restricted for some reels.

At the end of the last game in the BB, the initialization process at the end of the BB is performed in the same manner as at the end of the last game in the BB in the above-described first embodiment, and the identification is performed based on the initialization table at the end of the BB. By initializing the area in which the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 and the output buffers of 1 to 3 BETLEDs 14 to 16 are set, the display mode of the game auxiliary display 12 and 1 to 3 BETLEDs 14 to 16 after the end of BB Is controlled to be turned off (see FIG. 6).

On the other hand, at the end of the last game in the CB, a process of initializing the area in which the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 and the output buffers of the 1 to 3 BETLEDs 14 to 16 are set is performed as in the initialization process at the end of the BB. Instead, only the initialization process at the end of the game, which is performed at the end of the game regardless of whether it is BB or CB, is performed, and at the end of the last game in CB, the game auxiliary display 12 and Data related to the game (data on the number of payouts, data on the number of bets) that is the basis for creating display data for 1-3 BETLEDs 14 to 16 are initialized, but each output of the game auxiliary display 12 and 1-3 BETLEDs 14 to 16 The display data set in the buffer is not initialized.

As shown in FIG. 7, after the last game in the CB is completed, the display data set in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 is not initialized, so that after the last game in the CB, the display data is not initialized. Until the start switch 7 is turned ON with the specified number of bets set, the game auxiliary display 12 continues to display the number of medals to be paid out in the last game in the CB. ing.

Further, after the last game in the CB is completed, the display data set in the output buffers of 1-3 BETLEDs 14 to 16 is not initialized, so that after the last game in the CB, the medal insertion unit 4 Until the bet number is set by inserting a medal or operating the MAXBET switch 6, the 1-3 BETLEDs 14 to 16 continue to display the bet number set in the last game in the CB. It has become like.

[About 7-segment display]
Next, FIG. 8 shows a 7-segment display that constitutes each of the credit display 11, the game auxiliary display 12, and the game information display 50. FIG. 8 is a diagram showing a 7-segment display. As shown in FIG. 8, the 7-segment display includes seven segments, segments A to G, and a segment DP (decimal point). For example, when displaying "1" on a 7-segment display of 1, segment B and segment C are made to emit light. As a result, "1" can be displayed on the 7-segment display. Further, in the following, one segment constituting the seven segments and one LED such as 1BETLED14 are collectively referred to as a “light emitting unit”.

[Control of various indicators and LEDs by the main CPU 41a]
Using FIG. 9, various indicators (credit indicator 11, game auxiliary indicator 12, set value indicator 24, game information indicator 50) and LEDs (1 to 3 BETLED 14 to 16, input request LED 17, input request LED 17) by the main CPU 41a, The control of the light emitting mode of the start effective LED18, the advantageous section LED19, and the replaying LED20) will be described. First, "digit" will be described. The "digit" is composed of one or more light emitting units. In the following, the digit is also referred to as “DG”. Further, two or more DGs are also referred to as a DG group. In the present embodiment, the first DG group includes DG1 to DG6. The second DG group includes DG1 to DG4 different from each of DG1 to DG4 included in the first DG group. DG is sometimes called a "group".

In the example of FIG. 9, DG1 of the first DG group is a DG including seven segments (segments A to G) included in the first digit 7-segment display of the credit display 11 and an anode. The DG2 of the first DG group is a DG including seven segments (segments A to G) included in the second-digit 7-segment display of the credit display 11 and an anode. The DG3 of the first DG group is a DG including seven segments (segments A to G) included in the first-digit 7-segment display of the game auxiliary display 12 and an anode. The DG4 of the first DG group is a DG including seven segments (segments A to G) included in the second-digit 7-segment display of the game auxiliary display 12 and an anode.

DG5 of the first DG group is a DG including 7 LEDs and an anode. The seven LEDs are 1BETLED14, 2BETLED15, 3BETLED16, turn-on request LED17, start effective LED18, advantageous section LED19, and replaying LED20, respectively. The DG6 of the first DG group is a DG including seven segments (segments A to G) included in the 7-segment display of the set value display and an anode.

In FIG. 9, the second-digit 7-segment display (DG2) of the credit display 11 of the first DG group and the second-digit 7-segment display (DG4) of the credit display 11 of the second DG group. Describes segments A to G together in one block for simplification of drawings.

The DG1 of the second DG group is a DG including eight segments (segments A to G and a segment DP) included in the first-digit 7-segment display of the game information display and an anode. Similarly, DG2 to DG4 of the second DG group have eight segments (segments A to G and segment DP) including the second to fourth digit 7-segment displays of the game information display, and an anode. DG including.

Next, the game control board 40 will be described. The game control board 40 is equipped with a main CPU 41a and a plurality of output ports. In the example of FIG. 9, the first output port 61, the second output port 62, and the third output port 63 are described as a plurality of output ports, but in reality, other output ports also exist.

The first output port 61, the second output port 62, and the third output port 63 each have eight output terminals D0 to D7. Of the eight output terminals D0 to D7 of the first output port 61, the light emitting signals S0 to S6 are output from each of the seven output terminals D0 to D6. Of the eight output terminals D0 to D7 of the second output port 62, light emitting signals S10 to S17 are output from each of the eight output terminals D0 to D7. In this way, the light emitting signals S0 to S6 and the light emitting signals S10 to S17 are output separately (from another output port). Of the eight output terminals D0 to D7 of the third output port 63, the selection signals DG1 to DG6 are output from each of the six output terminals D0 to D5.

The selection signal DG is a signal for selecting (designating) the DG of the light emitting unit to be light-emitting. The light emitting signals S0 to S6 are signals for designating the light emitting mode of the light emitting unit included in the DG selected by the selection signal DG among the six DGs in the first DG group. The light emitting signals S10 to S17 are signals for designating the light emitting mode of the light emitting unit included in the DG selected by the selection signal DG among the four DGs in the second DG group.

First, the first output port 61 will be described. The signal line from the output terminal D0 of the first output port 61 is connected to each of the segments A of DG1 to DG4 of the first DG group, the segment A of DG6, and the 1BETLED 14 of DG5 of the first DG group. The light emitting signal S0 is output from the output terminal D0 of the first output port 61 under the control of the main CPU 41a. Therefore, the light emission signal S0 is input to each of the segments A of DG1 to DG4 of the first DG group, the segment A of DG6, and the 1BETLED14 of DG5 of the first DG group.

The signal line from the output terminal D1 of the first output port 61 is connected to each segment B of DG1 to DG4 of the first DG group, segment B of DG6, and 2BETLED15 of DG5 of the first DG group. The light emitting signal S1 is output from the output terminal D1 of the first output port 61 under the control of the main CPU 41a. Therefore, the light emission signal S1 is input to each of the segments B of DG1 to DG4 of the first DG group, the segment B of DG6, and the 2BETLED15 of DG5 of the first DG group.

The signal line from the output terminal D2 of the first output port 61 is connected to each of the segments C of DG1 to DG4 of the first DG group, the segment C of DG6, and the 3BETLED 16 of DG5 of the first DG group. The light emitting signal S2 is output from the output terminal D2 of the first output port 61 under the control of the main CPU 41a. Therefore, the light emission signal S2 is input to each of the segments C of DG1 to DG4 of the first DG group, the segment C of DG6, and the 3BETLED16 of DG5 of the first DG group.

The signal line from the output terminal D3 of the first output port 61 is connected to each of the segments D of DG1 to DG4 of the first DG group, the segment D of DG6, and the LED 20 during replay of DG5 of the first DG group. The light emitting signal S3 is output from the output terminal D3 of the first output port 61 under the control of the main CPU 41a. Therefore, the light emitting signal S3 is input to each of the segments D of DG1 to DG4 of the first DG group, the segment D of DG6, and the LED 20 during replay of DG5 of the first DG group.

The signal line from the output terminal D4 of the first output port 61 is connected to each of the segment E of each of the DG1 to DG4 of the first DG group, the segment E of the DG6, and the advantageous section LED19 of the DG5 of the first DG group. The light emitting signal S4 is output from the output terminal D4 of the first output port 61 under the control of the main CPU 41a. Therefore, the light emitting signal S4 is input to each of the segment E of each of the DG1 to DG4 of the first DG group, the segment E of the DG6, and the advantageous section LED19 of the DG5 of the first DG group.

The signal line from the output terminal D5 of the first output port 61 is connected to each of the segment F of each of the DG1 to DG4 of the first DG group, the segment F of the DG6, and the start effective LED 18 of the DG5 of the first DG group. The light emitting signal S5 is output from the output terminal D5 of the first output port 61 under the control of the main CPU 41a. Therefore, the light emitting signal S5 is input to each of the segment F of each of the DG1 to DG4 of the first DG group, the segment F of the DG6, and the start effective LED 18 of the DG5 of the first DG group.

The signal line from the output terminal D6 of the first output port 61 is connected to each of the segment G of each of the DG1 to DG4 of the first DG group, the segment G of the DG6, and the input request LED 17 of the DG5 of the first DG group. The light emitting signal S6 is output from the output terminal D6 of the first output port 61 under the control of the main CPU 41a. Therefore, the light emission signal S6 is input to each of the segment G of each of the DGs 1 to DG4 of the first DG group, the segment G of the DG6, and the input request LED 17 of the DG5 of the first DG group. Further, the output terminal D7 of the first output port 61 is unused.

Next, the second output port 62 will be described. The signal line from the output terminal D0 of the second output port 62 is connected to each segment A of DG1 to DG4 of the second DG group. The light emitting signal S10 is output from the output terminal D0 of the second output port 62 under the control of the main CPU 41a. Therefore, the light emission signal S10 is input to each segment A of DG1 to DG4 of the second DG group.

The signal line from the output terminal D1 of the second output port 62 is connected to each segment B of DG1 to DG4 of the second DG group. The light emitting signal S11 is output from the output terminal D1 of the second output port 62 under the control of the main CPU 41a. Therefore, the light emission signal S11 is input to each segment B of DG1 to DG4 of the second DG group.

The signal line from the output terminal D2 of the second output port 62 is connected to each segment C of DG1 to DG4 of the second DG group. The light emitting signal S12 is output from the output terminal D2 of the second output port 62 under the control of the main CPU 41a. Therefore, the light emission signal S12 is input to each segment C of DG1 to DG4 of the second DG group.

The signal line from the output terminal D3 of the second output port 62 is connected to each segment D of DG1 to DG4 of the second DG group. The light emitting signal S13 is output from the output terminal D3 of the second output port 62 under the control of the main CPU 41a. Therefore, the light emission signal S13 is input to each segment D of DG1 to DG4 of the second DG group.

The signal line from the output terminal D4 of the second output port 62 is connected to each segment E of DG1 to DG4 of the second DG group. The light emitting signal S14 is output from the output terminal D4 of the second output port 62 under the control of the main CPU 41a. Therefore, the light emission signal S14 is input to each segment E of DG1 to DG4 of the second DG group.

The signal line from the output terminal D5 of the second output port 62 is connected to each segment F of DG1 to DG4 of the second DG group. The light emitting signal S15 is output from the output terminal D5 of the second output port 62 under the control of the main CPU 41a. Therefore, the light emission signal S15 is input to each segment F of DG1 to DG4 of the second DG group.

The signal line from the output terminal D6 of the second output port 62 is connected to each segment G of DG1 to DG4 of the second DG group. The light emitting signal S16 is output from the output terminal D6 of the second output port 62 under the control of the main CPU 41a. Therefore, the light emission signal S16 is input to each segment G of DG1 to DG4 of the second DG group.

The signal line from the output terminal D7 of the second output port 62 is connected to each segment DP of DG1 to DG4 of the second DG group. The light emitting signal S17 is output from the output terminal D7 of the second output port 62 under the control of the main CPU 41a. Therefore, the light emission signal S17 is input to each segment DP of DG1 to DG4 of the second DG group.

Next, the third output port 63 will be described. The signal line from the output terminal D0 of the third output port 63 is connected to the anode of DG1 of the first DG group and the anode of DG1 of the second DG group. The selection signal DG1 is output from the output terminal D0 of the third output port 63 under the control of the main CPU 41a. Therefore, the selection signal DG1 is input to the anode of DG1 in the first DG group and the anode of DG1 in the second DG group.

The signal line from the output terminal D1 of the third output port 63 is connected to the anode of DG2 of the first DG group and the anode of DG2 of the second DG group. The selection signal DG2 is output from the output terminal D1 of the third output port 63 under the control of the main CPU 41a. Therefore, the selection signal DG2 is input to the anode of DG2 in the first DG group and the anode of DG2 in the second DG group.

The signal line from the output terminal D2 of the third output port 63 is connected to the anode of the DG3 of the first DG group and the anode of the DG3 of the second DG group. The selection signal DG3 is output from the output terminal D2 of the third output port 63 under the control of the main CPU 41a. Therefore, the selection signal DG3 is input to the anode of DG3 in the first DG group and the anode of DG3 in the second DG group.

The signal line from the output terminal D3 of the third output port 63 is connected to the anode of the DG4 of the first DG group and the anode of the DG4 of the second DG group. The selection signal DG4 is output from the output terminal D3 of the third output port 63 under the control of the main CPU 41a. Therefore, the selection signal DG4 is input to the anode of DG4 in the first DG group and the anode of DG4 in the second DG group.

The signal line from the output terminal D4 of the third output port 63 is connected to the anode of the DG5 of the first DG group. The selection signal DG5 is output from the output terminal D4 of the third output port 63 under the control of the main CPU 41a. Therefore, the selection signal DG5 is input to the anode of the DG5 of the first DG group.

The signal line from the output terminal D5 of the third output port 63 is connected to the anode of the DG6 of the first DG group. The selection signal DG6 is output from the output terminal D5 of the third output port 63 under the control of the main CPU 41a. Therefore, the selection signal DG6 is input to the anode of the DG6 of the first DG group.

Both the output terminal D6 and the output terminal D7 of the third output port 63 are unused. Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9, the selection signal DG1 to the selection signal DG4 are shared between the first DG group and the second DG group. In other words, the selection signal DG1 to the selection signal DG4 are shared by the first DG group and the second DG group. Further, the selection signal DG5 and the selection signal DG6 are used in the first DG group, but are not used in the second DG group.

Further, each of the output terminals D0 to D6 of the first output port 61 corresponds to each of the light emitting units to which the light emission signals output from the output terminals D0 to D6 are input. Further, each of the output terminals D0 to D7 of the second output port 62 corresponds to each of the light emitting units to which the light emission signals output from the output terminals D0 to D7 are input.

For example, the output terminal D0 of the first output port 61 has segment A of DG1 of the first DG group, segment A of DG2 of the first DG group, segment A of DG3 of the first DG group, segment A of DG4 of the first DG group, and the first. It corresponds to 1BETLED of DG5 of 1DG group and segment A of DG6 of 1st DG group. Further, the output terminal D0 of the second output port 62 includes segment A of DG1 of the second DG group, segment A of DG2 of the second DG group, segment A of DG3 of the second DG group, and segment A of DG4 of the second DG group, respectively. It corresponds. In FIG. 9, the signal lines from the output terminals D0 to D6 of the first output port 61 and the signal lines from the output terminals D0 to D7 of the second output port 62 are omitted for simplification of the drawings. are doing.

Further, the unused output terminals (NC: Non-Connect), that is, D7 of the first output port 61 and D6 and D7 of the third output port 63 are ground-connected in the present embodiment. ing. No signal line is wired between the unused output terminal and the light emitting unit.

The anode of each DG is an anode common common to the cathodes of the light emitting portions included in the DG. For example, the anode of DG1 in the first DG group is an anode common common to the cathodes of the first digit segments A to G of the credit display 11.

The main CPU 41a executes bit control (8-bit control) for controlling the first output port 61, the second output port 62, and the third output port 63. Regarding the selection signal DG output from the third output port 63, for example, when the selection signal DG1 is output, the bit control of "00000001" is executed, and when the selection signal DG3 is output, "00000100" is executed. Bit control is executed. Further, of the 8-digit bit notation, the 1st digit value corresponds to the control to the output terminal D0 of each output port, and the 8th digit value corresponds to the control to the output terminal D7 of each output port. ..

Further, when the segments A of the DG1 to DG4 and the DG6 of the first DG group are to emit light, the emission signal S0 is output from the output terminal D0 of the first output port 61, so that the bit control of "00000001" is executed. .. Further, when the segments A of the DG1 to DG4 of the second DG group are to emit light, the emission signal S0 is output from the output terminal D0 of the second output port 62, so that the bit control of "00000001" is executed.

When the selection signal DG is output from the third output port 63, the selection signal DG is input to the anode of the corresponding DG. Further, when the light emitting signal S is output from the first output port 61, the light emitting signal S is input to the cathode of the corresponding light emitting unit in the DG of the first DG group. When the light emitting signal S is input to the cathode of the light emitting unit, the selection signal DG input to the anode flows to the cathode as a current. As the current flows from the anode to the cathode in this way, the light emitting unit to which the light emitting signal S is input emits light.

When the light emitting signal S is output from the second output port 62, the light emitting signal S is input to the cathode of the corresponding light emitting unit in the DG of the second DG group. When the light emitting signal S is input to the cathode of the light emitting unit, the selection signal DG input to the anode flows to the cathode as a current. As the current flows from the anode to the cathode in this way, the light emitting unit to which the light emitting signal S is input emits light.

As described above, the selection signals DG1 to the selection signal DG6 output from the third output port 63 can be said to be signals for selecting (designating) the DG that causes the light emitting unit to emit light. Further, the light emitting signal S0 to the light emitting signal S6 output from the first output port 61 and the light emitting signal S10 to the light emitting signal S17 output from the second output port 62 are light emission included in the DG selected by the selection signal DG. It can be said that it is a signal for designating the light emitting mode of the unit.

Further, in FIG. 9, the signal lines of the respective output terminals and the corresponding light emitting units may be directly connected or indirectly (for example, via a substrate such as a relay substrate). You may try to connect.

Further, the slot machine 1 has a normal state, a setting change state, and a setting confirmation state. The normal state refers to a state during a game and a state in which a game is waiting (for example, a state in which a demo screen is displayed). In the following, as the DG state, a state in which the light emitting unit can emit light (a state in which light can be emitted) is referred to as a "light emitting state", and a state in which the light emitting unit cannot emit light is referred to as a "non-light emitting state".

In the normal state, DG1 to DG5 of the first DG group and DG1 to DG4 of the second DG group are in a light emitting state, and the other DGs are in a non-light emitting state. In the setting change state and the setting confirmation state, DG6 of the first DG group and DG1 to DG4 of the second DG group are in a light emitting state, and the other DGs are in a non-light emitting state. As a modification, the DG1 to DG4 of the second DG group may be in the non-light emitting state in the setting change state and the setting confirmation state. Further, in the setting change state and the setting confirmation state, the DGs 1 to DG5 of the first DG group may be in a light emitting state.

Further, all the DGs 1 to DG5 included in the first DG group are mounted on the display board. The display board is attached to the inside of the slot machine 1 so that each light emitting unit included in the DGs 1 to DG5 is exposed to the outside (see the portion of the game display unit 13 shown in FIG. 1). Further, the DG 6 included in the first DG group is mounted on the relay board. The DG1 to DG4 included in the second DG group are mounted on the game control board 40. In the description of FIG. 9, DG1 to DG4 of the second DG group and the game control board 40 are described separately, but in reality, the DG1 to DG4 are mounted on the game control board 40.

Further, the storage area of the slot machine 1 includes a game program area in which a game program related to the progress of the game is stored, a game data area in which game data used by the game program is stored, a game RAM area, and the progress of the game. It includes a non-game program area in which non-game programs that are not involved are stored, a non-game data area in which non-game data used by the non-game program is stored, a non-game RAM area, and the like. Further, the game program area, the game data area and the game RAM area are collectively referred to as a game area, and the non-game program area, the non-game data area and the non-game RAM area are collectively referred to as a non-game area.

The game program is, for example, bet number setting, credit settlement, BET processing for bet number settlement, internal lottery processing for determining whether or not to allow the occurrence of winning by random number lottery (internal lottery), reel This is a program for executing a reel rotation process related to rotation, a payout process for paying out medals, and the like. Further, the non-gaming program includes, for example, test signal output processing, foreign matter detection processing, door monitoring processing, error processing, and the like. The test signal output process is a process for outputting a test signal generated in connection with the result of the game. The foreign matter detection process is a process for detecting a foreign matter in the medal passage by the insertion slot sensor that detects the medal inserted from the medal insertion unit 4. The door monitoring process is a process for detecting the opening of the front door 1b. The error processing is a process of disabling the game when an error is detected.

The light emitting unit included in the DG of the first DG group is a light emitting unit involved in the progress of the game. Therefore, the process to the first output port 61 (the process of creating the light emission signal of the first DG group), which is the output port corresponding to the first DG group, is the process executed by the game program. Hereinafter, the processing executed by the game program is referred to as "in-capacity processing".

On the other hand, the light emitting unit included in the DG of the second DG group is a light emitting unit that is not involved in the progress of the game. Therefore, the process to the second output port 62 (the process of creating the light emission signal of the second DG group), which is the output port corresponding to the second DG group, is the process executed by the non-game program. Hereinafter, the processing executed by the non-game program is referred to as "out-of-capacity processing".

In this way, since the in-capacity processing and the out-capacity processing can be separated according to the output port, it is compared with the gaming machine in which the in-capacity processing and the out-capacity processing are mixed for one output port. , The processing load can be reduced.

[About signal switching processing]
FIG. 10 is a flowchart of the signal switching process executed by the main CPU 41a. This signal switching process is executed in the timer interrupt process executed every predetermined period (0.56 ms in this embodiment).

First, in step ST1, the main CPU 41a clears the selection signal DG from the third output port 63. Here, "clearing the signal" means, in the present embodiment, executing the bit control of "00000000000" in which all the output ports outputting the signal are "0". For example, clearing the selection signal DG means executing a bit control of "00000000000" on the third output port 63.

Next, in step ST2, the light emission signal of the first output port 61 (that is, the light emission signal of the DG of the first DG group) is cleared. Next, in step ST3, bit control for updating and setting the light emission signal of the first output port 61 (that is, the light emission signal of the DG of the first DG group) is executed for the first output port 61. The steps ST2 and ST3 are executed in the capacity processing.

Next, in step ST4, the light emission signal of the second output port 62 (that is, the light emission signal of the DG of the second DG group) is cleared. Next, in step ST5, bit control for updating and setting the light emission signal of the second output port 62 (that is, the light emission signal of the DG of the second DG group) is executed for the second output port 62. The steps ST4 and ST5 are executed in the out-of-capacity processing.

Next, in step ST6, bit control is executed for the third output port 63 so as to update and set the selection signal DG from the third output port 63. By this bit control, the update-set selection signal is output from the third output port 63.

Further, until the next signal switching process (after 0.56 ms has elapsed) is executed, the output of the light emission signal updated and set from the first output port 61 and the light emission signal updated and set from the second output port 62 The output and the output of the update-set selection signal from the third output port 63 continue.

Next, the process of FIG. 10 will be described with reference to a specific example. In this specific example, a case where "14" is displayed on the credit display, "08" is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12, and "0723" is displayed on the game information display 50 will be described in the normal state. Here, among these cases, the display of "14" on the credit display and the display of "23" on the first and second digits of the game information display 50 will be described. Actually, in addition to the credit display 11, the game auxiliary display 12, and the game information display 50, the state LED (DG5 of the first DG group) also emits light according to the state of the game state. Further, the game information display 50 emits light from the segment DP, while the credit display 11, the game auxiliary display 12, and the set value display 24 do not emit light from the segment DP.

First, a process for displaying "4" on the first digit of the credit display (DG1 of the first DG group) and displaying "3" on the first digit of the game information display (DG1 of the second DG group). Will be described. As this process, first, by outputting the selection signal DG1 from the third output port 63, the DG1 of the first DG group and the DG1 of the second DG group are selected as the DG that causes the segment (light emitting unit) to emit light. Further, the bit control for outputting the selection signal DG1 from the third output port 63 is "00000001", and the bit control is executed for the third output port 63.

During the period in which the selection signal DG1 is output from the third output port 63, the first output port 61 is processed to display "4" on the DG1 of the first DG group, that is, the segment B, the segment C, and the segment. The process of causing F and segment G to emit light is executed. In the process of emitting light from these segments, the light emission signal S1, the light emission signal S2, the light emission signal S6, and the light emission signal S7 are output from the first output port 61, and the other light emission signals S are not output. That is, the bit control "01100110" is executed for the first output port 61.

Further, during the period in which the selection signal DG1 is output from the third output port 63, the second output port 62 is processed to display "3" on the DG1 of the second DG group, that is, the segment A and the segment B. , Segment C, segment D, segment G, and segment DP are executed. In the process of emitting light from these segments, the light emission signal S10, the light emission signal S11, the light emission signal S12, the light emission signal S13, the light emission signal S16, and the light emission signal S17 are output from the second output port 62, and the other light emission signals S are output. Do not let it. That is, the bit control of "1100111" is executed for the second output port 62.

In this way, "4" is displayed on the first digit (DG1 of the first DG group) of the credit display 11, and "3" is displayed on the first digit (DG1 of the second DG group) of the game information display 50. As a process for doing so, the bit control of "01100110" is executed for the first output port 61, the bit control of "11000111" is executed for the second output port 62, and the bit control of "00000001" is executed for the third output port 63. To execute.

When such a state continues for 0.56 ms, the signal switching process shown in FIG. 10 is executed. In step ST1, the selection signal DG is cleared. Specifically, the bit control of "00000001" for the third output port 63 is changed to the bit control of "0000000000".

Next, in step ST2, the light emission signal of the first output port 61 is cleared. Specifically, the bit control of "01100110" for the first output port 61 is changed to the bit control of "0000000000".

Next, in step ST3, bit control is executed for the first output port 61 so as to update and set the light emission signal of the first output port 61 (that is, the light emission signal of the DG of the first DG group). Here, a process of updating and setting the light emission signal of the first output port 61 so as to newly display "1" on the DG2 of the first DG group, that is, a process of causing the segments B and C to emit light is executed. The process of causing these segments to emit light outputs the light emission signal S2 and the light emission signal S3 from the first output port 61, and prevents the other light emission signals S from being output. That is, as the bit control for the first output port 61, the bit control of "00000011" is executed by updating from "0000000000".

Next, in step ST4, the light emission signal of the second output port 62 is cleared. Specifically, the bit control of "11000111" for the second output port 62 is changed to the bit control of "0000000000".

Next, in step ST5, bit control is executed for the second output port 62 so as to update and set the light emission signal of the second output port 62 (that is, the light emission signal of the DG of the second DG group). Here, the process for newly displaying "2" on the DG2 of the second DG group, that is, the segment A, the segment B, the segment D, the segment E, the segment G, and the segment DP are emitted. Execute the process to make it. In the process of emitting light from these segments, the light emission signal S10, the light emission signal S11, the light emission signal S13, the light emission signal S14, the light emission signal S16, and the light emission signal S17 are output from the second output port 62, and the other light emission signals S are output. Do not let it. That is, as the bit control for the second output port 62, the bit control of "11011011" is executed by updating from "0000000000".

Next, in step ST6, bit control is executed for the third output port 63 so as to update and set the selection signal DG. Here, as the bit control for the third output port 63, the bit control of "00000010" is executed by updating from "0000000000".

By executing such a process, "4" is displayed in the first digit of the credit display 11 and "3" is displayed in the first digit of the game information display 50, and the operation is executed after 0.56 ms have elapsed. By the signal switching process, the display of the first digit "4" of the credit display 11 is terminated, and the display of "1" is displayed in the second digit of the credit display 11. At the same time, the display of the first digit "3" of the game information display 50 ends, and the display of "2" is displayed in the second digit of the game information display 50.

Then, the next signal switching process is executed when 0.56 ms has elapsed from the start of the DG signal switching process. In the signal switching process, DG3 of the first DG group (1st digit 7-segment display of the game auxiliary display 12) and DG3 of the 2nd DG group (3rd digit 7-segment display of the game information display 50). A new numerical value (in this case, "8" for DG3 of the first DG group and "7" for DG4 of the second DG group) is displayed.

FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining switching of the selection signal DG. 11 (A) to 11 (F) show the outputs of the selection signals DG1 to DG5 from the output terminals D0 to D5 of the third output port 63, respectively.

As shown in FIGS. 11A to 11F, the main CPU 41a has the selection signal DG1 (00000001) → the selection signal DG2 (000000010) → the selection signal DG3 (00000100) → the selection signal DG4 (00001000) → the selection signal. The output selection signal DG is switched in the order of DG5 (00010000) → selection signal DG6 (00100000) → selection signal DG1 (000000001) → selection signal DG2 (00000010) ... (predetermined order). The period during which one selection signal DG is output is a predetermined period, which is 0.56 ms in the present embodiment. That is, the main CPU 41a switches the output selection signal DG every 0.56 ms elapse. For example, when the selection signal DG1 is output, DG1 of the first DG group and DG1 of the second DG group are selected (designated).

In each of FIGS. 11A to 11F, the process of lowering the selection signal corresponds to step ST1 of FIG. 10, and the process of raising the selection signal corresponds to step ST6.

Further, the main CPU 41a switches the output of the light emitting signal S from the first output port 61 in synchronization with the switching of the output of the selection signal DG from the third output port 63 (steps ST2 and ST3), and 2 The output of the light emitting signal S from the output port 62 is also switched (step ST4 and step ST5).

When any of the selection signals DG1 to DG4 is output from the third output port 63, the DG corresponding to the output selection signal DG among the DGs of the first DG group can emit light, and the second DG group The DG corresponding to the output selection signal DG among the DGs of the above can emit light.

Further, regarding the selection signal DG5 and the selection signal DG6 from the third output port 63, DG5 and DG6 are present as corresponding DGs in the first DG group. However, there is no corresponding DG in the second DG group. The bit control of the second output port 62 when the selection signal DG5 or the selection signal DG6 is output will be described. When the selection signal DG5 or the selection signal DG6 is output, the non-emission bit control is executed so that none of the segments of the DG in the second DG group emit light. This non-emission bit control is a bit control of "00000000" in which all are 0. Therefore, when the selection signal DG5 or the selection signal DG6 is output, the segment included in the second DG group is turned off.

Further, in the normal state, the DG6 (set value display) of the first DG is in a non-light emitting state. Therefore, in the normal state, the non-emission bit control is executed for the first output port 61 during the period when the signal DG6 is output from the third output port 63.

Further, in the setting confirmation state and the setting change state, DG1 to DG5 of the first DG group are in the non-light emitting state. Therefore, in the setting confirmation state and the setting change state, the non-emission bit control is executed for the first output port 61 during the period when the signals DG1 to DG5 are output from the third output port 63.

As described with reference to FIGS. 10 and 11, a method of making a plurality of DGs appear to emit light at the same time by switching the DG that causes the light emitting unit to emit light every short time (0.56 ms) is described. Hereinafter, it is also referred to as "dynamic emission". In order to enable all DGs to emit light at the same time without adopting a configuration for executing dynamic light emission, it is necessary to provide independent wiring for each DG and each light emitting unit. However, when set in this way, the number of wires increases, the cost increases, and the assembly load also increases. In the present embodiment, such a problem can be solved by executing dynamic light emission.

Further, by executing the dynamic light emission of the present embodiment, the DG to be light-emitting by the signal switching process, which is the interrupt process executed every short period (0.56 ms in the present embodiment), is sequentially switched. As a result, it is possible to make it appear to be substantially the same as the state in which a plurality of DGs are simultaneously emitting light (as if they are simultaneously emitting light to the human eye). Further, if the LED that emits light is different for each interrupt process, power consumption can be suppressed and seizure of the light emitting portion can be suppressed. Further, the brightness can be increased by repeating the point emission as compared with the LED which always emits light.

[About special conditions]
Next, the special state will be described. The special state is one of the error state and the above-mentioned setting confirmation state. The error state is a state in which an error is detected. When an error occurs, the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment and a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine can detect the error. Here, the error includes, for example, an error based on a failure of a device in the game machine, an error based on an increase / decrease in a game medium in the game machine, an error based on a player's fraudulent activity, and the like.

An error caused by a failure of a device in a game machine is, for example, an error detected when a movable body (accessory) included in the game machine does not operate properly. The error based on the increase / decrease of the game medium in the game machine is, for example, an error detected due to a shortage of the game medium in the storage tank in which the game medium to be paid out is stored. The game medium is, for example, a medal in the slot machine 1 and a pachinko ball in the pachinko game machine. Further, in the slot machine 1, the storage tank is also called a hopper, and an error based on an increase or decrease in a game medium in the game machine is also called a hopper error.

An error based on a player's fraudulent activity is, for example, a game medium fraudulent payout error. The game medium illegal payout error is an error detected by illegally paying out the game medium by performing an illegal operation on the storage unit in which the game medium is stored. As described above, the error state is a state in which an error is detected.

[Timing chart when transitioning to a special state]
Next, with reference to FIG. 12, a timing chart at the time of transition to the special state will be described. FIG. 12A is a diagram showing the transition to the special state. ON indicates that the state has been shifted to the special state, and OFF indicates that the state has not been shifted to the special state. FIG. 12B is a diagram showing a special state notification process for notifying the transition to a special state (for example, displaying an error screen, outputting an alarm sound, etc.). ON indicates that the special state notification process has been executed, and OFF indicates that the special state notification process has not been executed. FIG. 12C is a diagram showing light emission of 1-3 BETLEDs 14 to 16, advantageous section LED19, and turn-on request LED 17. ON indicates that the 1st to 3rd BETLEDs 14 to 16, the advantageous section LED19 and the closing request LED17 are emitting light, and OFF indicates that the 1st to 3rd BETLEDs 14 to 16, the advantageous section LED19 and the closing request LED17 are emitting light. Indicates that it is not. FIG. 12D is a diagram showing light emission between the turn-on request LED 17 and the start effective LED 18. ON indicates that the on-request LED 17 and the start effective LED 18 are emitting light, and OFF indicates that the on-request LED 17 and the start effective LED 18 are not emitting light.

As shown in FIG. 12B, the special state notification process is executed in T1 that has been shifted to the special state. Further, as shown in FIG. 12C, in the T1, the light emission of 1-3 BETLEDs 14 to 16, the advantageous section LED19, and the closing request LED17 is maintained. Further, as shown in FIG. 12 (D), at T1, the turn-on request LED 17 and the start effective LED 18 are turned off.

As shown in FIG. 12A, it is assumed that a power interruption occurs at T2 (power supply is stopped) and the power supply is restored at T3 (power supply is restarted). As shown in FIG. 12B, the special state notification process ends in T2 where the power failure occurs, and the special state notification process returns in T3 where the power failure is restored. As shown in FIG. 12C, in T2 where the power failure occurred, 1-3BETLED14-16, the advantageous section LED19, and the turn-on request LED17 were turned off, and in T3 where the power failure was restored, 1-3BETLED14 ~ 16, the advantageous section LED 19, and the input request LED 17 emit light. Further, as shown in FIG. 12 (D), the turn-off request LED 17 and the start effective LED 18 are kept off even in T2 and T3.

FIG. 13 is a timing chart when the modified example is shifted to the special state. The difference between FIGS. 12 and 13 is that the notification of the advantageous section can be executed by both the main control unit 41 (main side) and the sub control unit 91 (sub side). As shown in FIG. 13 (E), the notification of the advantageous section performed by the main control unit 41 (main side) is referred to as "main side advantageous section notification", and the notification of the advantageous section performed by the sub control unit 91 (sub side) is performed. It is called "sub-side advantageous section notification".

The main side advantageous section notification is a notification using the advantageous section LED 19, and for example, the advantageous section LED 19 is made to emit light when the section is shifted to the advantageous section. The sub-side advantageous section notification is a notification using the liquid crystal display 51. For example, when the sub-side advantageous section notification is performed, the liquid crystal display 51 displays information that can identify the transition to the advantageous section. To do.

Further, the display area of the liquid crystal display 51 is larger than that of the advantageous section LED 19. Therefore, the sub-side advantageous section notification can execute the advantageous section notification in a more conspicuous manner than the main side advantageous section notification.

As shown in FIGS. 13 (E) and 13 (F), in T1 that has transitioned to the special state, the main side advantageous section notification that is not so noticeable to the player is terminated, while the sub side that is noticeable to the player. The advantageous section notification is maintained. According to such a configuration, even if the player shifts to the special state, the player can be made to recognize that the shift to the advantageous section is performed by the maintained sub-side advantageous section notification.

Further, as a modification of FIG. 13, in T1 which has shifted to the special state, the sub-side advantageous section notification which is conspicuous to the player is terminated, while the main side advantageous section notification which is not so conspicuous to the player is maintained. It may be. According to such a configuration, the main side advantageous section notification that is not so conspicuous is maintained, so that the player can be made to recognize that the section has been shifted to the advantageous section for the time being. Further, since the sub-side advantageous section notification that is conspicuous to the player ends, the notification of the special state (FIG. 13B) can be made conspicuous. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player and the clerk of the game store to recognize that the state has been changed to the special state.

[Example of production]
Next, an example of the effect executed by the slot machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 14 to 22.

(Direction at the time of bonus rush)
FIG. 14 is a diagram for explaining the effect at the time of entering the bonus. As described above, in the present embodiment, the BB is won by deriving the 7 sets, and the state is controlled to the bonus state based on the occurrence of the BB winning. As shown in FIG. 14 (A), in a game in which a BB is elected and a symbol combination (“7-7-7”) corresponding to the BB can be derived, when the start operation is performed, seven sets are aligned. An effect that encourages derivation is performed. For example, the image of "Aim at 777!" Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and the sound of "Aim at 7" is output from the speakers 53 and 54.

Although not shown, if the first stop operation and the second stop operation are performed at a timing when the player can stop the 7 symbols, the 7 symbols are stopped on each of the reels 2L and 2C.

As shown in FIG. 14B, when the third stop operation is performed at the timing when the player can stop the 7 symbols, the reel 2R is stopped and the 7 symbols are derived. At this time, the player's hand keeps pressing the stop switch 8R. That is, after the stop switch is manually pressed, even if the pressing is maintained without being released, the rotation of the reel is stopped and the symbol is led out to the perspective window 3. Further, the speakers 53 and 54 output a "don" sound that effectively suggests that the reel has stopped. However, while the reels are stopped, the winning determination is not executed unless the third stop release is performed and the pressing of the stop switch 8R is released.

As shown in FIG. 14C, when the third stop release is performed and the press on the stop switch 8R is released, the winning determination process is executed by the main control unit 41, and a bonus winning is generated. Further, the main control unit 41 executes the game end processing to start the freeze. The freeze control at this time invalidates the bet number setting by the MAXBET switch 6 for starting the next game over a predetermined delay period.

When a bonus prize is generated, the sub control unit 91 notifies the bonus prize. For example, as shown in FIGS. 14 (C) and 14 (D), the liquid crystal display 51 displays the image of "BIG BONUS" so as to stop at the center position of the screen while changing from the enlarged state to the reduced state. At the same time, the speakers 53 and 54 output a "papper" sound to congratulate the bonus prize. Further, the bonus lamp 26 is turned on, and the side lamp 27 and the reel backlight 28 are turned on or blinking, which effectively suggests the bonus winning. The winning notification is not limited to the bonus lamp 26, the side lamp 27, and the reel backlight 28, and may be one that lights or blinks the lower panel located below the reel. Further, when the lower panel is lit in the normal state, the side lamp 27 and the reel backlight 28 may be turned off to notify the winning. The bonus lamps continue to be lit until the bonus ends (FIGS. 14 (C) to (E), FIGS. 15 (F) to (K), FIGS. 16 (a) to 16 (d), which will be described later, FIGS. 17 (e) to (i), FIGS. 18 (k) to 18 (l)).

After that, as shown in FIG. 14 (E), the image of the character and "BIG BONUS!" Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and the "big" suggests that the speakers 53 and 54 will enter the big bonus. The sound "bonus" is output.

In this way, the reel is stopped by performing the third stop operation, the winning judgment process is executed by performing the third stop release, and the bonus is won based on the fact that the 7-matched symbol combinations are derived. At the same time, the state shifts to a bonus. Further, when a set of 7 symbol combinations is derived, freeze control is performed and freeze is started, and bonus winning notification is performed during the freeze.

(Production when bonus production is selected)
FIG. 15 is a diagram for explaining the effect when the bonus effect is selected. After it is suggested that the big bonus is entered in the effect shown in FIG. 14 (E), as shown in FIG. 15 (F), the entire screen of the liquid crystal display 51 gradually or at once is called whiteout. The production is done. In addition, the speakers 53 and 54 output a "seen" sound that seems to match the whiteout.

With the whiteout as described above as a boundary, the screen for notifying the bonus prize as shown in FIG. 14 (E) is greatly changed to the selection screen for the bonus effect as shown in FIG. 15 (G). The screen state changes. In addition, the freeze ends after the whiteout. That is, after the whiteout, the bet number setting by operating the MAXBET switch 6 becomes effective.

As shown in FIG. 15 (G), on the bonus effect selection screen, an image for allowing the player to select the effect during the bonus is displayed. Specifically, an image for allowing the player to select one of the music A, music B, and music C as BGM corresponding to each of the three characters is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. The player can change the character image displayed in the front row by operating the effect switch 56, and each time the change is made, the music corresponding to the character displayed in the front row is played from the speakers 53 and 54. It is output. As a result, the player can select his / her favorite music while listening to the sounds output from the speakers 53 and 54.

In selecting the bonus effect, it may be possible to select a stage in which items related to the effect during the bonus, such as characters appearing, a background image, music and sound effects, and lighting modes, are different from each other. In addition, in selecting the bonus production, it is possible to select a stage in which the matters related to the notification production during the bonus, such as the mode of the winning notification at the time of winning a rare role such as cherry or watermelon and the probability that the winning notification will be executed, are different. You may.

As shown in FIG. 15 (H), when the player operates the MAXBET switch 6, the music corresponding to the character displayed in the front row at that time is determined as the music in the bonus, and the music is played from the speakers 53 and 54. A "picone" sound is output that suggests that the decision has been made. Here, the speaker 53 and the speaker 54 are each divided into channels for sound output, and in the example shown in FIG. 15 (H), the determined music is output from the speaker 53, while the speaker A sound effect of "picone" is output from 54. Since the freeze has already ended at this time, the number of bets is also set at the same time by operating the MAXBET switch 6 at the time of determining the music. The music is not limited to the operation of the MAXBET switch 6, and may be determined by other operations such as the start switch 7 and the effect switch 56.

After the music to be bonused is determined in the effect shown in FIG. 15 (H), as shown in FIG. 15 (I), the entire screen of the liquid crystal display 51 gradually or at once becomes completely white to produce a whiteout effect. Is done. In addition, the speakers 53 and 54 output a "seen" sound that seems to match the whiteout.

With the whiteout as described above as a boundary, the screen of the liquid crystal display 51 is greatly expanded from the selection screen of the bonus effect as shown in FIG. 15 (H) to the effect screen during the bonus as shown in FIG. 15 (J). The state changes. During the bonus, the screen during the bonus is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and the music selected by the player is output from the speakers 53 and 54.

As shown in FIG. 15 (K), when the start operation is performed, the game during the bonus starts and the reels start rotating.

In this way, if the freeze starts at the time of bonus winning and the bonus winning notification is performed during the freeze, the freeze ends with the whiteout as the boundary, and then the player is allowed to select the production state in the bonus. Will be executed. Control of the bonus is suggested to the player by the effect of letting the player select the effect state in such a bonus. Then, when the bonus effect is determined, the game in the bonus is executed based on the determined effect state.

(Direction at the time of winning notification when a bell is won in the final game during the bonus)
FIG. 16 is a diagram for explaining an effect at the time of winning notification when a bell is won in the final game during the bonus. As shown in FIG. 16A, during the bonus, the character is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 together with the background image at night. Further, in the upper right corner of the screen, a total payout image 51a showing the total number of payouts during the bonus is displayed. In this example, the total payout image 51a indicates that 296 medals were paid out during the bonus, such as "TOTAL 296". As described above, the BB ends when the number of medals paid out exceeds 296, so that the BB ends when even one more medal is paid out. After the second stop is released, the reels 2L and the reels 2C are stopped and the bell symbol is derived in both cases. Since the third stop operation has not been performed yet, the reel 2R is rotating.

As shown in FIG. 16B, when the player performs the third stop operation, the reel 2R is stopped and the bell symbol is derived. At this time, the player's hand keeps pressing the stop switch 8R. That is, after the stop switch is manually pressed, even if the pressing is maintained without being released, the rotation of the reel is stopped and the symbol is led out to the perspective window 3. However, although the reels stop, the winning determination is not executed unless the third stop release is performed and the pressing of the stop switch 8R is released.

As shown in FIG. 16C, when the third stop release is performed and the press on the stop switch 8R is released, the winning determination process is executed by the main control unit 41 to generate a bell winning. When a bell prize is generated, the sub control unit 91 notifies the bell prize. For example, as shown in FIG. 16C, the image of "8 GET !!" is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51.

With the payout of eight medals by winning the bell, the BB end condition is satisfied, and the game shifts from the next game to the non-bonus game. On the game auxiliary display 12, the number "8" indicating that eight medals have been paid out is displayed on the 7-segment display. Further, the total payout image 51a indicates that 304 medals were paid out during the bonus. As described above, the speaker 53 and the speaker 54 have separate channels for sound output, and the speaker 53 outputs the music in the bonus, while the speaker 54 suggests a bell prize. A winning sound called "Pyrrolirollin" is output. Further, the side lamp 27 and the reel backlight 28 are turned on or blinked, which effectively suggests a bell winning. The winning notification is not limited to the side lamp 27 and the reel backlight 28, and may be one that lights or blinks the lower panel located below the reel. Further, when the lower panel is lit in the normal state, the winning notification may be given by turning it off.

As shown in FIG. 16D, after the winning notification is given, the image of "8 sheets GET !!" on the liquid crystal display 51 disappears, no sound is output from the speakers 53 and 54, and the side The lamp 27 and the reel backlight 28 are turned off.

In this way, in the final game of the bonus, the reel is stopped by performing the third stop operation, the winning judgment process is executed by performing the third stop release, and the symbol combination of the bells is derived. Based on that, the bell is won and the winning notification is given. In addition, the prize notification is performed by displaying an image of "8 sheets GET !!" by the liquid crystal display 51, sound output by the speakers 53 and 54, and lighting or blinking by the side lamp 27 and the reel backlight 28, while the prize notification is performed. After that, the liquid crystal display 51 displays the image of "8 GET !!", the speakers 53 and 54 output the sound, and the side lamp 27 and the reel backlight 28 do not turn on or blink. .. Even if the winning notification is given by the lower panel, the lower panel does not light or blink. If the lower panel is lit during normal operation, the lower panel may be lit to return to the normal state after the winning notification is given by turning off the light.

(Direction when the result is notified during freezing)
17 and 18 are diagrams for explaining the effect at the time of notification of the result during freezing. After the bell winning is suggested in the effect shown in FIG. 16 (c) and the suggestion of bell winning is completed as shown in FIG. 16 (d), the game is ended by the main control unit 41 as shown in FIG. 17 (e). When the time processing is executed, the freeze starts. The freeze control at this time invalidates the bet number setting by the MAXBET switch 6 for starting the next game over a predetermined delay period. As shown in FIG. 16C, the freeze may start when the third stop release is performed.

During the freeze, a result notification is performed to notify the result of the game during the bonus. When the result notification is started, the result start notification suggesting the start of the result notification is performed. In the result notification, the speakers 53 and 54 output a "pilone" sound suggesting the start of the result notification, and the side lamp 27 and the reel backlight 28 are turned on or blinked to notify the result. A start is suggested.

As shown in FIG. 17 (f), no sound is output from the speakers 53 and 54, and the side lamp 27 and the reel backlight 28 are turned off after the result start notification is performed.

After the result start notification is completed as shown in FIG. 17 (f), the door closing effect performed before the result notification is executed as shown in FIG. 17 (g). In the door closing effect, an animation movie is displayed in which a pair of door images 51b moves toward the center of the screen from both ends (left end and right end) of the display area of the liquid crystal display 51 to close the door. At this time, the effect image during the bonus is displayed on the back side of the door image 51b, but when the door is closed, the effect image during the bonus disappears from the player's field of view. Further, the brightness and the like (brightness or brightness) of the door image 51b is lower than the brightness and the like of other images different from the door image 51b. For example, the brightness of the door image 51b is lower than the brightness of the result image 51d described later. By making the brightness of the door image 51b lower than the brightness of the result image 51d, the result image 51d displayed on the front surface of the door image 51b can be made conspicuous.

As shown in FIG. 17 (g), when the door closing effect is started, an animation movie in which the door image 51b starts to move from both ends on the front side of the effect image during the bonus is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and the speakers 53 and 54. The sound of "go ..." that the door closes is output from.

As shown in FIG. 17 (h), during the door closing effect, an animation movie in which the door image 51b approaches the center of the screen is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and the doors are closed from the speakers 53 and 54. A "gogogo" sound is output.

As shown in FIG. 17 (i), at the end of the door closing effect, the door image 51b is completely closed at the center of the screen, and the effect image in the bonus displayed on the back side completely disappears from the field of view. An animation such as this is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and the speakers 53 and 54 output a “gashan” sound as if the door was closed.

After the door closing effect is completed, a spark display is performed as shown in FIG. 18 (j). Specifically, after the door is completely closed by the movement of the door image 51b, a spark image 51c showing sparks is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 on the front side of the door image 51b in the central portion of the screen. The brightness and the like (brightness or brightness) of the spark image 51c is higher than the brightness and the like of other images different from the spark image 51c. For example, the brightness of the spark image 51c is higher than the brightness of the effect image and the brightness of the door image 51b during the bonus. By making the brightness of the spark image 51c higher than the brightness of the door image 51b, the spark image 51c displayed on the front side of the door image 51b can be made conspicuous. Further, when the spark image 51c is displayed, a "bonk" sound such as sparks is output from the speakers 53 and 54. Further, the side lamp 27 lights up or blinks in a mode for notifying the result (for example, a color or a lighting interval).

After the spark display is completed, the result notification is started as shown in FIG. 18 (k). The result notification is performed using the area where the spark image 51c is displayed, and the result image 51d showing the result of the game during the bonus is displayed in the area. In the present embodiment, the number of acquired medals (total number of medals paid out) during the bonus is displayed in the result image 51d. Further, when the result image 51d is displayed, a "pyeong" sound is output from the speakers 53 and 54 so that the result image 51d appears. The bonus lamp 26 starts to turn off and the brightness decreases, while the side lamp 27 keeps lighting or blinking in a mode for result notification (for example, color or lighting interval). In the present embodiment, the number of acquired medals during the bonus is displayed in the result image 51d, but the number is not limited to this, for example, the net increase in medals can be displayed, or the number of consecutive winnings of the bonus (so-called number of consecutive villas). ) May be displayed, the number of digested games in the bonus may be displayed, or a plurality of these displays may be displayed in combination.

As shown in FIG. 18 (l), first, the first digit (in this example, the number "4") is displayed in the result image 51d. A "pin" sound is output from the speakers 53 and 54 along with the display of the first digit. The brightness of the bonus lamp 26 is further reduced, while the side lamp 27 keeps lighting or blinking in a result notification mode (for example, color or lighting interval).

As shown in FIG. 18 (m), the second digit (in this example, the number "0") is then displayed in the result image 51d. Along with the display of the second digit, a "pin" sound is output from the speakers 53 and 54. The bonus lamp 26 is completely turned off, while the side lamp 27 keeps lighting or blinking in a result notification mode (for example, color or lighting interval).

As shown in FIG. 18 (n), the third digit (in this example, the number "3") is then displayed in the result image 51d. Along with the display of the third digit, a "pin" sound is output from the speakers 53 and 54. The side lamp 27 keeps lighting or blinking in a result notification mode (for example, color or lighting interval).

By displaying the third digit in the result image 51d, the player is notified that the number of acquired images is 304 as the final result.

After the final result is displayed in the result image 51d, as shown in FIG. 18 (о), a caution display for alerting the player regarding the game is performed. When the attention-calling display is performed, the caution-calling image 51e that urges the player to call attention to the game is displayed above the result image 51d. The alert image 51e shows the characters "Be careful not to get stuck" and "Pachislot is a play that you can enjoy moderately." By performing such a warning display, it is possible to suppress excessive games for the player.

In this way, the freeze starts after the notification of the bell winning is performed in the final game of the bonus, and the result notification is performed during the freeze. Further, after the result notification is performed, a warning display is performed. The side lamp 27 continues to be lit or blinking in the mode for notifying the result until the warning display is finished.

(Production when RT production is selected)
FIG. 19 is a diagram for explaining an effect when the RT effect is selected. Here, RT (replay time) is a state in which the winning probability of the replaying combination in the internal lottery is higher than in the non-RT (for example, normal state), and in the RT state, the replay is performed more frequently than in the non-RT state. Since the game is executed, the player can easily proceed with the game without consuming the medals he owns. In the present embodiment, after the bonus ends, the state is controlled to the RT state for a predetermined period (for example, 30 games), and the player can select the effect in the RT state. ..

After the warning display is performed in the effect shown in FIG. 18 (о), as shown in FIG. 19 (p), the entire screen of the liquid crystal display 51 gradually or at once becomes completely white to produce a whiteout effect. Will be done. In addition, the speakers 53 and 54 output a "seen" sound that seems to match the whiteout.

With the whiteout as described above as a boundary, the screen for result notification and alert display as shown in FIG. 18 (о) is greatly changed to the selection screen for RT effect as shown in FIG. 19 (q). The screen state of the display 51 changes. In addition, the freeze ends after the whiteout. That is, after the whiteout, the bet number setting by operating the MAXBET switch 6 becomes effective. Further, the display of the number "8" on the game auxiliary display 12 indicating that eight medals have been paid out in the final game of the bonus disappears.

As shown in FIG. 19 (q), on the RT effect selection screen, an image for allowing the player to select the effect during RT is displayed. Specifically, an image for allowing the player to select one stage from the stages A, B, and C as the stage corresponding to each of the three characters is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. The player can change the character image displayed in the front row by operating the effect switch 56, and each time the change is made, the music on the stage corresponding to the character displayed in the front row is the speaker 53. It is output from 54. As a result, the player can select his / her favorite stage while listening to the sounds output from the speakers 53 and 54.

The plurality of stages provided during RT differ in matters related to RT. For example, a plurality of stages differ in matters related to production during RT, such as characters appearing, background images, music and sound effects, and lighting modes. In addition, for example, in a plurality of stages, the mode of winning notification and the probability that the winning notification will be executed when a rare role such as cherry or watermelon is won, and the mode of winning notification and the probability that the winning notification will be executed when the bonus is won, etc. , Matters related to notification production during RT are different. For example, in a plurality of stages, when an advantageous section is added by an internal lottery, a medal during RT such as an up-down mode in which the addition probability is likely to change and a stable mode in which the addition probability is hard to change, etc. Matters concerning payout may be different.

As shown in FIG. 19 (r), when the player operates the MAXBET switch 6, the stage corresponding to the character displayed in the front row at that time is determined as the stage during RT, and the stage is set from the speakers 53 and 54. A "picone" sound is output that suggests that the decision has been made. Here, the speaker 53 and the speaker 54 are each divided into channels for sound output, and in the example shown in FIG. 19 (r), the speaker 53 outputs music corresponding to the determined stage. On the other hand, the speaker 54 outputs a sound effect of "picone". Since the freeze has already ended at this time, the number of bets is also set at the same time by operating the MAXBET switch 6 at the time of stage determination. The stage is not limited to the operation of the MAXBET switch 6, and the stage may be determined by other operations such as the start switch 7 and the effect switch 56.

After the stage during RT is determined in the effect shown in FIG. 19 (r), as shown in FIG. 19 (s), the entire screen of the liquid crystal display 51 gradually or at once becomes pure white to produce a whiteout effect. Is done. In addition, the speakers 53 and 54 output a "seen" sound that seems to match the whiteout.

With the whiteout as described above as a boundary, the screen of the liquid crystal display 51 is greatly expanded from the RT effect selection screen as shown in FIG. 19 (r) to the effect screen during RT as shown in FIG. 19 (t). The state changes. During RT, the screen during RT corresponding to the stage selected by the liquid crystal display 51 is displayed, and the music corresponding to the stage selected by the player is output from the speakers 53 and 54.

As shown in FIG. 19 (u), when the start operation is performed, the game during RT starts and the reels start rotating.

In this way, if the freeze starts after the bell winning notification is given in the final game of the bonus and the result notification is made during the freeze, the freeze ends at the whiteout, and then in the RT. An effect that allows the player to select the effect state is executed. It is suggested that the state is controlled by RT after the end of the bonus by the effect of letting the player select such an RT effect. Then, when the RT effect is determined, the game during RT is executed based on the determined effect state.

[Processing timing chart]
A timing chart of the processing of the main control unit 41 and the processing of the sub control unit 91 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is a timing chart of processing by the main control unit 41 and the sub control unit 91.

At t1, when the third stop operation is performed and the stop switch is pressed in the final game during the bonus, the main control unit 41 stops the reels based on the detected third stop operation.

At t2, when the third stop release is performed and the press on the stop switch is released, the main control unit 41 determines whether or not a prize has been generated by performing a prize determination process. When a prize is generated, the main control unit 41 pays out the number of medals corresponding to the prize and transmits a prize determination command capable of specifying the type of the generated prize to the sub control unit 91. On the other hand, when the sub-control unit 91 receives the winning determination command at t3, the sub-control unit 91 performs the winning notification shown in FIG. 16C.

Further, the main control unit 41 performs freeze control by executing the game end processing after the winning determination processing, and also transmits a freeze command to the effect of performing freeze control to the sub control unit 91. On the other hand, the sub control unit 91 controls the liquid crystal display 51, the speakers 53, 54, etc. according to the execution time of the freeze control executed on the main control unit 41 side based on the freeze command to execute the effect for freeze. To do.

For example, the sub-control unit 91 executes the door closing effect shown in FIGS. 17 (g) to 17 (i) from t4 to t5. Next, the sub-control unit 91 performs the spark display shown in FIG. 18 (j) from t5 to t6. Next, the sub-control unit 91 performs the result notification shown in FIGS. 18 (k) to 18 (n) from t6 to t7. Then, the sub-control unit 91 performs the warning display shown in FIG. 18 (о) from t7 to t8 after the result notification is performed. After that, the sub-control unit 91 displays the RT effect selection screen shown in FIGS. 19 (q) and 19 (r) on the liquid crystal display 51 from t8 to t9. The door closing effect, the spark display effect, and the result notification are executed by the sub control unit 91 over a predetermined time.

[Main effect]
Next, the main effects obtained by the above-described configuration will be described.

(1-1) A variable display unit (for example, reels 2L, 2C, 2R) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of types of identification information (for example, a symbol) that can be individually identified is provided.
In a slot machine (for example, slot machine 1) in which a display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display unit after the variable display unit is variablely displayed and a prize can be generated according to the display result.
A winning notification means for notifying the occurrence of a winning (for example, a winning notification shown in FIG. 16C) (for example, a process for performing a winning notification by the sub control unit 91).
A result display means (for example, a process of performing a result notification by the sub-control unit 91) for displaying a result image (for example, the result image 51d shown in FIG. 18) showing the result of the game in a specific state (for example, a big bonus).
A state transition means (for example, a process of controlling the state by the main control unit 41) for shifting the state from the specific state to a special state (for example, RT) after the end of the specific state.
It is provided with a delay control means (for example, a process of performing freeze control by the main control unit 41) for performing delay control (for example, freeze control) for delaying the progress of the game.
When the winning notification is performed in a game in which the specific state ends (for example, the final game in the bonus), the delay control is performed after the winning notification ends (for example, the winning notification shown in FIG. 16C). (Freeze starts as shown in FIG. 17 (e)), and the result image is displayed during the execution of the delay control (for example, as shown in FIGS. 18 (k) to 18 (о)). The result notification is performed during the freeze), suggesting a transition to the special state after the end of the delay control (for example, as shown in FIGS. 19 (q) and 19 (r), the selection of the RT effect is selected after the end of the freeze. It is done. See Figure 20).

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 16 to 20, when a winning notification is given due to a bell winning in the final game of the bonus, a freeze is executed after the winning notification, and a result is obtained during the freeze. Notification is performed. Then, after the freeze ends, the player selects the effect in the RT state that is controlled after the end of the bonus. As a result, it is possible to prevent the winning notification and the result notification from being mixed, and it is possible to show the player a smooth effect to the RT controlled after the bonus ends. Therefore, it is possible to effectively display the result image 51d showing the result of the game.

(1-2) A variable display unit (for example, reels 2L, 2C, 2R) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of types of identification information (for example, a symbol) that can be identified by each is provided.
In a slot machine (for example, slot machine 1) in which a display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display unit after the variable display unit is variablely displayed and a prize can be generated according to the display result.
A winning notification means for notifying the occurrence of a winning (for example, a winning notification shown in FIG. 16C) (for example, a process for performing a winning notification by the sub control unit 91).
A result display means (for example, a process of performing a result notification by the sub-control unit 91) for displaying a result image (for example, the result image 51d shown in FIG. 18) showing the result of the game in a specific state (for example, a big bonus).
A state transition means (for example, a process of controlling the state by the main control unit 41) for shifting the state from the specific state to a special state (for example, RT) after the end of the specific state.
Delay control means (for example, processing for performing freeze control by the main control unit 41) that performs delay control (for example, freeze control) that delays the progress of the game, and
A process of displaying a warning display means (for example, a process of displaying a warning by the main control unit 41) for displaying a warning image (for example, the warning image 51e shown in FIG. 18 (о)) for calling the player about the game. ) And
When the winning notification is performed in a game in which the specific state ends (for example, the final game in the bonus), the delay control is performed after the winning notification ends (for example, the winning notification shown in FIG. 16C). (The freeze starts as shown in FIG. 17 (e)), and the alert image is displayed together with the result image during the execution of the delay control (for example, FIGS. 18 (k) to 18 (о). ), A result notification is performed during the freeze, and a warning display is performed), suggesting a transition to the special state after the end of the delay control (for example, FIGS. 19 (q), (r). ), The RT effect is selected after the freeze is completed. See FIG. 20).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 18 (о), a result notification is performed during the freeze and a warning display is also performed. As a result, it is possible to effectively suppress excessive games for the player by displaying a warning at a suitable timing such as during a freeze.

(1-3) A variable display unit (for example, reels 2L, 2C, 2R) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of types of identification information (for example, a symbol) that can be identified by each is provided.
In a slot machine (for example, slot machine 1) in which a display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display unit after the variable display unit is variablely displayed and a prize can be generated according to the display result.
A winning notification means for notifying the occurrence of a winning (for example, a winning notification shown in FIG. 16C) (for example, a process for performing a winning notification by the sub control unit 91).
A result display means (for example, a process of performing a result notification by the sub-control unit 91) for displaying a result image (for example, the result image 51d shown in FIG. 18) showing the result of the game in a specific state (for example, a big bonus).
A state transition means (for example, a process of controlling the state by the main control unit 41) for shifting the state from the specific state to a special state (for example, RT) after the end of the specific state.
Delay control means (for example, processing for performing freeze control by the main control unit 41) that performs delay control (for example, freeze control) that delays the progress of the game, and
A process of displaying a warning display means (for example, a process of displaying a warning by the main control unit 41) for displaying a warning image (for example, the warning image 51e shown in FIG. 18 (о)) for calling the player about the game. ) And
When the winning notification is performed in a game in which the specific state ends (for example, the final game in the bonus), the delay control is performed after the winning notification ends (for example, the winning notification shown in FIG. 16C). (The freeze starts as shown in FIG. 17 (e)), and the alert image is displayed together with the result image during the execution of the delay control (for example, FIGS. 18 (k) to 18 (о). ), A result notification is performed during the freeze, and a warning display is performed), suggesting a transition to the special state after the end of the delay control (for example, FIGS. 19 (q), 19 (r)). As shown in Fig. 20, the RT effect is selected after the freeze is completed. See FIG. 20),
The result image is a predetermined period (for example, as shown in FIGS. 17, 18, and 20) after a related image different from the result image (for example, the door image 51b shown in FIGS. 17 and 18) is displayed. It is displayed when the period (t4 to t5) in which the door closing effect is executed has elapsed.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 17 and 20, after the result start notification, the door image 51b is first displayed, and the door closing effect is executed so that the door image 51b is closed. Then, as shown in FIGS. 18 and 20, after the door closing effect is executed for a predetermined period (the period from t4 to t5 shown in FIG. 20), the result image 51d is displayed via the spark display. In this way, even if the bonus ends, the result image 51d is displayed when the predetermined period elapses, so that the display of the result image 51d can be made conspicuous. Therefore, attention can be drawn to the result image 51d. In the example of FIG. 17, the predetermined period is the period during which the door closing effect is executed, but as a modified example, the predetermined period is, for example, the period during which the door closing effect is executed and the spark image 51c. It may be the total period with the displayed period.

(1-4) A variable display unit (for example, reels 2L, 2C, 2R) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of types of identification information (for example, a symbol) that can be identified by each is provided.
In a slot machine (for example, slot machine 1) in which a display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display unit after the variable display unit is variablely displayed and a prize can be generated according to the display result.
A winning notification means for notifying the occurrence of a winning (for example, a winning notification shown in FIG. 16C) (for example, a process for performing a winning notification by the sub control unit 91).
A result display means (for example, a process of performing a result notification by the sub-control unit 91) for displaying a result image (for example, the result image 51d shown in FIG. 18) showing the result of the game in a specific state (for example, a big bonus).
A state transition means (for example, a process of controlling the state by the main control unit 41) for shifting the state from the specific state to a special state (for example, RT) after the end of the specific state.
Delay control means (for example, processing for performing freeze control by the main control unit 41) that performs delay control (for example, freeze control) that delays the progress of the game, and
A process of displaying a warning display means (for example, a process of displaying a warning by the main control unit 41) for displaying a warning image (for example, the warning image 51e shown in FIG. 18 (о)) for calling the player about the game. )When,
It is provided with a notification means (for example, a game auxiliary display 12) capable of notifying information (for example, the number of payouts).
When the winning notification is performed in a game in which the specific state ends (for example, the final game in the bonus), the delay control is performed after the winning notification ends (for example, the winning notification shown in FIG. 16C). (The freeze starts as shown in FIG. 17 (e)), and the alert image is displayed together with the result image during the execution of the delay control (for example, FIGS. 18 (k) to 18 (о). ), A result notification is performed during the freeze, and a warning display is performed), suggesting a transition to the special state after the end of the delay control (for example, FIGS. 19 (q), 19 (r)). As shown in Fig. 20, the RT effect is selected after the freeze is completed. See FIG. 20),
The result image is a predetermined period (for example, as shown in FIGS. 17, 18, and 20) after a related image different from the result image (for example, the door image 51b shown in FIGS. 17 and 18) is displayed. It is displayed when the period (t4 to t5) when the door closing effect is executed has passed.
The notification of information about the game performed by the notification means based on the prize generated in the game at which the specific state ends ends after a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the display of the result image (for example, shown in FIG. 18 (k)). As shown in FIG. 19 (p), the display of the result image 51d starts, and after the display of the result image 51d ends by whiteout, the display of the number of payouts on the game auxiliary display 12 ends).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 16C, when eight medals were paid out in the final game during the bonus, a number indicating that eight medals were paid out on the game auxiliary display 12. "8" is displayed on the 7-segment display. After that, while the prize notification, the result notification, and the warning display are performed, the number "8" is displayed on the game assistance display 12, but the freeze ends at the whiteout shown in FIG. 19 (p). When shifting to the selection of the RT effect, the display of the number "8" on the game auxiliary display 12 disappears as shown in FIG. 19 (q). As a result, it is possible to effectively suggest to the player that the bonus state is switched to the RT state by changing the payout display on the game auxiliary display 12.

(1-5) A variable display unit (for example, reels 2L, 2C, 2R) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of types of identification information (for example, a symbol) that can be identified by each is provided.
In a slot machine (for example, slot machine 1) in which a display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display unit after the variable display unit is variablely displayed and a prize can be generated according to the display result.
A winning notification means for notifying the occurrence of a winning (for example, a winning notification shown in FIG. 16C) (for example, a process for performing a winning notification by the sub control unit 91).
A result display means (for example, a process of performing a result notification by the sub-control unit 91) for displaying a result image (for example, the result image 51d shown in FIG. 18) showing the result of the game in a specific state (for example, a big bonus).
A state transition means (for example, a process of controlling the state by the main control unit 41) for shifting the state from the specific state to a special state (for example, RT) after the end of the specific state.
Delay control means (for example, processing for performing freeze control by the main control unit 41) that performs delay control (for example, freeze control) that delays the progress of the game, and
A process of displaying a warning display means (for example, a process of displaying a warning by the main control unit 41) for displaying a warning image (for example, the warning image 51e shown in FIG. 18 (о)) for calling the player about the game. )When,
It is provided with a notification means (for example, a game auxiliary display 12) capable of notifying information (for example, the number of payouts).
When the winning notification is performed in a game in which the specific state ends (for example, the final game in the bonus), the delay control is performed after the winning notification ends (for example, the winning notification shown in FIG. 16C). (The freeze starts as shown in FIG. 17 (e)), and the alert image is displayed together with the result image during the execution of the delay control (for example, FIGS. 18 (k) to 18 (о). ), A result notification is performed during the freeze, and a warning display is performed), suggesting a transition to the special state after the end of the delay control (for example, FIGS. 19 (q), 19 (r)). As shown in Fig. 20, the RT effect is selected after the freeze is completed. See FIG. 20),
The result image is a predetermined period (for example, as shown in FIGS. 17, 18, and 20) after a related image different from the result image (for example, the door image 51b shown in FIGS. 17 and 18) is displayed. It is displayed when the period (t4 to t5) when the door closing effect is executed has passed.
The notification of information about the game performed by the notification means based on the winning a prize generated in the game at which the specific state ends ends after a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the display of the result image (for example, shown in FIG. 18 (k)). As shown in FIG. 19 (p), the display of the result image 51d starts, the display of the result image 51d ends by whiteout, and then the display of the number of payouts on the game auxiliary display 12 ends).
The suggestion that the state shifts to the special state includes a selection effect that allows the player to select the effect state in the special state (for example, an effect that causes the player to select the RT effect shown in FIG. 19 (q)).
By the selection effect, the effect state in the special state is determined before the state shifts to the special state (for example, before the RT screen shown in FIG. 19 (t) is displayed, FIG. 19 (r) shows. RT production is confirmed as shown).

Specifically, the RT screen is displayed as shown in FIG. 19 (t), and then shown in FIG. 19 (r) before the game in RT is started by the start operation as shown in FIG. 19 (U). The RT effect is determined by the player's selection. As a result, it is possible to determine the production in RT without digesting the game in the RT state.

(1-6) A variable display unit (for example, reels 2L, 2C, 2R) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of types of identification information (for example, a symbol), each of which can be identified, is provided.
In a slot machine (for example, slot machine 1) in which a display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display unit after the variable display unit is variablely displayed and a prize can be generated according to the display result.
A winning notification means for notifying the occurrence of a winning (for example, a winning notification shown in FIG. 16C) (for example, a process for performing a winning notification by the sub control unit 91).
A result display means (for example, a process of performing a result notification by the sub-control unit 91) for displaying a result image (for example, the result image 51d shown in FIG. 18) showing the result of the game in a specific state (for example, a big bonus).
A state transition means (for example, a process of controlling the state by the main control unit 41) for shifting the state from the specific state to a special state (for example, RT) after the end of the specific state.
Delay control means (for example, processing for performing freeze control by the main control unit 41) that performs delay control (for example, freeze control) that delays the progress of the game, and
A process of displaying a warning display means (for example, a process of displaying a warning by the main control unit 41) for displaying a warning image (for example, the warning image 51e shown in FIG. 18 (о)) for calling the player about the game. )When,
It is provided with a notification means (for example, a game auxiliary display 12) capable of notifying information (for example, the number of payouts).
When the winning notification is performed in a game in which the specific state ends (for example, the final game in the bonus), the delay control is performed after the winning notification ends (for example, the winning notification shown in FIG. 16C). (Freeze starts as shown in FIG. 17 (e)), and the alert image is displayed together with the result image during the execution of the delay control (for example, FIGS. 18 (k) to 18 (о). ), The result notification is performed during the freeze, and the warning display is performed), and when the delay control ends, the display of the warning image ends (for example, as shown in FIG. 19 (p)). As shown in FIG. 19 (q) and (r), the alert display ends at the boundary of the whiteout), suggesting a transition to the special state after the end of the delay control (for example, RT after the end of freeze as shown in FIGS. The production is selected (see Fig. 20),
The result image is a predetermined period (for example, as shown in FIGS. 17, 18, and 20) after a related image different from the result image (for example, the door image 51b shown in FIGS. 17 and 18) is displayed. It is displayed when the period (t4 to t5) when the door closing effect is executed has passed.
The notification of information about the game performed by the notification means based on the winning a prize generated in the game at which the specific state ends ends after a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the display of the result image (for example, shown in FIG. 18 (k)). As shown in FIG. 19 (p), the display of the result image 51d starts, the display of the result image 51d ends by whiteout, and then the display of the number of payouts on the game auxiliary display 12 ends).
The suggestion that the state shifts to the special state includes a selection effect that allows the player to select the effect state in the special state (for example, an effect that causes the player to select the RT effect shown in FIG. 19 (q)).
By the selection effect, the effect state in the special state is determined before the state shifts to the special state (for example, before the RT screen shown in FIG. 19 (t) is displayed, FIG. 19 (r) shows. RT production is confirmed as shown).

Specifically, after the warning display is performed as shown in FIG. 18 (о), the whiteout is performed as shown in FIG. 19 (p), and the freeze ends at the boundary of the whiteout. The awakening display ends. As a result, the warning display can be terminated at a suitable timing when the freeze ends.

(1-7) A variable display unit (for example, reels 2L, 2C, 2R) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of types of identification information (for example, a symbol) that can be identified by each is provided.
In a slot machine (for example, slot machine 1) in which a display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display unit after the variable display unit is variablely displayed and a prize can be generated according to the display result.
A winning notification means for notifying the occurrence of a winning (for example, a winning notification shown in FIG. 16C) (for example, a process for performing a winning notification by the sub control unit 91).
A result display means (for example, a process of performing a result notification by the sub-control unit 91) for displaying a result image (for example, the result image 51d shown in FIG. 18) showing the result of the game in a specific state (for example, a big bonus).
A state transition means (for example, a process of controlling the state by the main control unit 41) for shifting the state from the specific state to a special state (for example, RT) after the end of the specific state.
Delay control means (for example, processing for performing freeze control by the main control unit 41) that performs delay control (for example, freeze control) that delays the progress of the game, and
A process of displaying a warning display means (for example, a process of displaying a warning by the main control unit 41) for displaying a warning image (for example, the warning image 51e shown in FIG. 18 (о)) for calling the player about the game. )When,
It is provided with a notification means (for example, a game auxiliary display 12) capable of notifying information (for example, the number of payouts).
When a specific display result (for example, 7 sets of symbol combinations) is derived, the state shifts to the specific state (for example, as shown in FIG. 14, a bonus is obtained by deriving 7 sets of symbol combinations). Winning will occur),
The delay control is performed when the specific display result is derived (for example, as shown in FIG. 14 (c), the freeze starts when a set of 7 symbol combinations is derived and the third stop release is performed. ), It is suggested that the state shifts to the specific state during the execution of the delay control (for example, as shown in FIGS. 14C to 14F, a bonus winning notification is performed during the freeze). After the delay control ends, an effect that causes the player to select the effect state in the specific state is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 15 (G), the bonus effect is selected after the freeze ends).
When the winning notification is performed in a game in which the specific state ends (for example, the final game in the bonus), the delay control is performed after the winning notification ends (for example, the winning notification shown in FIG. 16C). (Freeze starts as shown in FIG. 17 (e)), and the alert image is displayed together with the result image during the execution of the delay control (for example, FIGS. 18 (k) to 18 (о). ), The result notification is performed during the freeze, and the warning display is performed), and when the delay control ends, the display of the warning image ends (for example, as shown in FIG. 19 (p)). As shown in FIG. 19 (q) and (r), the alert display ends at the boundary of the whiteout), suggesting a transition to the special state after the end of the delay control (for example, RT after the end of freeze as shown in FIGS. The production is selected (see Fig. 20),
The result image is a predetermined period (for example, as shown in FIGS. 17, 18, and 20) after a related image different from the result image (for example, the door image 51b shown in FIGS. 17 and 18) is displayed. It is displayed when the period (t4 to t5) when the door closing effect is executed has passed.
The notification of information about the game performed by the notification means based on the winning a prize generated in the game at which the specific state ends ends after a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the display of the result image (for example, shown in FIG. 18 (k)). As shown in FIG. 19 (p), the display of the result image 51d starts, the display of the result image 51d ends by whiteout, and then the display of the number of payouts on the game auxiliary display 12 ends).
The suggestion that the state shifts to the special state includes a selection effect that allows the player to select the effect state in the special state (for example, an effect that causes the player to select the RT effect shown in FIG. 19 (q)).
By the selection effect, the effect state in the special state is determined before the state shifts to the special state (for example, before the RT screen shown in FIG. 19 (t) is displayed, FIG. 19 (r) shows. RT production is confirmed as shown).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14 (c), when a set of 7 symbol combinations is derived and the third stop release is performed, the freeze is started by the processing at the end of the game, and FIGS. 14 (C) to 14 (C) As shown in F), a bonus winning notification is given during the freeze, then the freeze ends at the whiteout as shown in FIG. 15 (F), and after the freeze ends as shown in FIG. 15 (G). The selection of bonus production is made. As a result, it is possible to determine the effect in the bonus without digesting the game in the bonus state.

(2-1) The result image 51d is set in the predetermined area after a special image (for example, the spark image 51c) different from the result image is displayed in the predetermined area (for example, the central portion of the screen in the liquid crystal display 51). (For example, as shown in FIGS. 18 (j) to (о), after the spark image 51c is displayed in the central portion of the screen, the result image 51d is displayed in the same central portion of the screen). Any image may be used as long as the display of the result image 51d in the "special image" result notification is conspicuous. Unlike the character image, the special image may be an effect image or a decorative image that enhances the image to be conspicuous (result image 51d in the present embodiment). Further, when the image to be conspicuous (fruit image 51d) is decorated with a plurality of kinds of colors, it is preferable that the color of the special image described above is a single color so as to further enhance the image to be conspicuous.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 18 (j) to 18 (о), the spark display is performed before the result notification is performed. In the spark display, the spark image 51c is displayed in the central portion of the screen, and then in the result notification, the result image 51d is displayed in the same central portion of the screen. As a result, the display of the result image 51d showing the result of the game can be made conspicuous, and the player's attention can be drawn to the result image 51d. Therefore, the result image 51d can be effectively displayed.

(2-2) The winning notification is performed from the start of the display of the door image 22 to the elapse of a predetermined period (in the present embodiment, at the timing when the display of the door image 51b is started). Therefore, since the winning notification is performed before the result image 51d is displayed, it is possible to prevent the player's attention to the display of the result image 51d from being hindered.

(2-3) Further, it is an effect related to the third stop operation that triggers the display of the door image 51b from the start of the display of the door image 51b to the elapse of a predetermined period, and is a liquid crystal display. The winning notification is executed by using the side lamp 27 which is a means other than 51. Therefore, since the winning notification using the side lamp 27 is performed before the result image 51d is displayed, it is possible to prevent the player's attention to the display of the result image 51d from being hindered.

(2-4) The image in which the door image 51b is completely closed becomes the background image in the result notification. The door image 51b is displayed with a brightness lower than the brightness of an image different from the door image 51b (for example, the result image 51d). Therefore, since the brightness of the background image in the result notification is lowered, the result image 51d can be made conspicuous. Therefore, attention can be drawn to the result image 51d.

(2-5) The result image 51d is displayed when an image in which the door image 51b does not move (that is, a background image by the door image 51b) is displayed because the closing of the door image 51b is completed. Therefore, since the movement of the door image 51b does not hinder the display of the result image 51d, the result image 51d can be attracted attention.

(2-6) A means for controlling the progress of a game, including a main control unit 41 for transmitting a command and a sub control unit 91 for controlling an effect based on the command. The sub control unit 91 can control the liquid crystal display 51. In addition, the passage of a predetermined period is measured from the time when the freeze command is received in the final game during the bonus (t4 in FIG. 20). The liquid crystal display 51 displays the result image 51d after the passage of a predetermined period is measured (t5 in FIG. 20). In this way, since the sub-control unit 91 that controls the liquid crystal display 51 measures the passage of a predetermined period, it is possible to easily manage the display timing of the result image 51d.

(2-7) The sub control unit 91 is an effect relating to the display of the result image 51d, and turns on the side lamp 27 during the result notification. Further, the sub-control unit 91 turns on the side lamp 27 for a period from the time when the door image 51b is closed until the result image is displayed, and then turns off the side lamp 27. Therefore, after the result notification is completed, the side lamp 27 is turned off, so that the control load on the side lamp 27 is reduced.

(2-8) The spark image 51c is displayed so as to be higher than the brightness of an image different from the spark image 51c (for example, the door image 51b). Therefore, attention can be focused on the spark image 51c, and attention can also be focused on the result image 51d displayed in the central portion of the screen on which the spark image 51c is displayed.

(2-9) Execute the control of displaying the result image 51d stepwise in order from the first digit (displaying in order from the smallest digit number) (first digit → second digit → third digit order). Display numbers with). Therefore, it is possible to make the player think that a numerical value having a large number of digits is displayed.

(3-1) As shown in FIGS. 12 (C) and 12 (D), a plurality of LEDs including a turn-on request LED 17, a start effective LED 18, and other LEDs (for example, 1 to 3 BET LEDs 14 to 16). When the LED is emitting light and the state shifts to the special state, the turn-on request LED 17 and the start effective LED 18 are turned off, while the light emission of the other LEDs is maintained.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9, in the first output port 61, the output terminal D5 corresponding to the start effective LED 18 and the output terminal D6 corresponding to the closing request LED 17 are provided adjacent to each other. The output terminal corresponding to the start effective LED 18 is an output terminal D5 that outputs a light emission signal S5 for controlling the light emission mode of the start effective LED 18. The output terminal corresponding to the ON request LED 17 is an output terminal D6 that outputs a light emission signal S6 for controlling the light emission mode of the ON request LED.

Since the output terminal D5 and the output terminal D6 are adjacent to each other in this way, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the light emitting stop processing of the light emitting means when the state is shifted to the special state. For example, in the bit control executed for the first output port 61 when the state is shifted to the special state, "0", which is a bit indicating turning off, can be continuously set. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the light emitting means for turning off the light when the state is changed to the special state.

Further, a gaming machine (first comparison target) that employs a configuration in which output terminals corresponding to LEDs to be turned off (hereinafter, also referred to as LEDs to be turned off) are separated (not adjacent to each other). A game machine), for example, a case where the output terminal corresponding to the start effective LED 18 is D0 and the output terminal corresponding to the closing request LED 17 is D4 will be described. In this case, noise may occur if the bit control for turning off D0 and D4 is executed when the selection signal DG5 is output and the state shifts to the special state. When the noise is generated, noise is also generated in the output terminal adjacent to D0, for example, the output terminal D1, and there is a possibility that bit inversion occurs in the output terminal D1.

On the other hand, the output terminal corresponding to the start effective LED 18 and the output terminal corresponding to the turn-on request LED are adjacent to each other (D5 and D6). Therefore, even if noise is generated by executing bit control to turn off the output terminal D5 and the output terminal D6, it is less likely to be affected by the noise as compared with the first comparison target gaming machine. can do.

(3-2) If the two LEDs to be turned off when the state is shifted to the special state are included in the first DG and the second DG, which are different DGs, respectively (hereinafter, the second comparison target). In the game machine), it is necessary to perform bit control for turning off the first output port even when the first DG is selected by the selection signal DG, and even when the second DG is selected by the selection signal DG. It is necessary to perform bit control for turning off the first output port, which complicates the process.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the two LEDs to be turned off when the state is shifted to the special state are included in one DG (DG5). Therefore, only when DG5 is selected by the selection signal DG, the bit control for turning off the first output port needs to be performed, so that the LED is turned off as compared with the second comparison target gaming machine. The process to be performed can be simplified.

(3-3) Further, the two LEDs to be turned off are LEDs suggesting that the operation by the player is effective, that is, the turn-on request LED 17 and the start effective LED 18. When the state is changed to the special state, the ON request LED and the start effective LED are turned off. Therefore, when the state is shifted to the special state, the notification that the operation by the player is effective ends, so that it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the operation by the player is effective.

(3-4) The special state includes a state (error state) that is transferred when an abnormality (error) occurs in the game machine. Further, the error state is a state in which the game does not proceed. Therefore, when an abnormality occurs in the game machine, it shifts to a special state, so that the game can be prevented from progressing.

(3-5) Further, even when the state is shifted to the special state, the LEDs to be maintained for light emission (hereinafter, also referred to as LED for maintaining light emission) are 1 to 3 BETLEDs 14 to 16, LED during replay 20, and advantageous section LED19. is there. Further, the output terminals D0 to D4 corresponding to the 1st to 3rd BETLEDs 14 to 16, the replaying LED20, and the advantageous section LED19 are adjacent to each other (see FIG. 9).

As a result, in the bit control executed for the first output port 61 when the state is shifted to the special state, "1" indicating a bit for maintaining light emission can be continuously set. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the light emission maintaining process of the light emitting means when the state is shifted to the special state.

If the output terminal corresponding to the LED to be turned off when shifting to a special state is sandwiched between the two output terminals corresponding to each of the two LEDs that maintain light emission, for example, it corresponds to the LED to be turned off. About a game machine (hereinafter, referred to as a third comparison target game machine) adopting a configuration in which the output terminal to be used is D1 and the two output terminals corresponding to the two LEDs that maintain light emission are D0 and D2. explain.

In this game machine, when the state is shifted to the special state, the bit control that maintains the light emission for D0 and D2, that is, "1" is set, and the bit control that turns off the light for D1, that is, "0" is set. The bit control to be set will be executed. Then, in the case of the bit control, for example, the bit control for setting "1" is executed for D1 due to the bit inversion due to the generation of noise, so that the LED that should be turned off is maintained. In some cases.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, two or more output terminals corresponding to each of the two LEDs that maintain light emission are adjacent to each other. Therefore, even if noise is generated, for example, the fact that the light emission of the LED that should be originally turned off is maintained can be made less likely to occur as compared with the third comparison target gaming machine.

Further, as shown in the first output port 61 of FIG. 9, the output terminals D0 to D4 corresponding to the LED for maintaining light emission are a group of 1 adjacent to each other, and the output terminal D5 corresponding to the LED to be turned off is used. It can be said that the output terminals D6 are one terminal group adjacent to each other.

(3-6) Further, as shown in FIG. 12 (C), the light emission of the advantageous section LED 19 is maintained in T1 which has been shifted to the special state. Therefore, it can be suggested to the player that even if it is shifted to the special state, it is shifted to the advantageous section.

(3-7) Further, as shown in FIG. 9, the first output port 61 has an output terminal D7 which is an unused output terminal. Further, the unused output terminal D7 is adjacent to the output terminal D6 corresponding to the turn-on request LED which is the LED to be turned off. Further, for the unused output terminal D7, bit control for turning off the light, that is, "0" is set. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the output terminal D6, which should originally be set to the bit "0" to be turned off, is set to "1" due to a malfunction or the like when the state is shifted to the special state.

(3-8) When the transition to the advantageous section is performed, the advantageous section LED 19 emits light. As shown in FIGS. 12B and 12C, when the advantageous section is shifted to, that is, when the advantageous section LED19 is emitting light and the special state is shifted, the notification of the special state is notified. Is executed, and the light emission of the advantageous section LED 19 continues. Therefore, even if the special state is changed while the advantageous section LED 19 is emitting light, the store clerk, the player, and the like can be made to recognize that the special state has been started, and the player can be made to recognize that the section is advantageous. it can.

(3-9) Further, as shown in FIGS. 12 (A) to 12 (C), the special state notification process is terminated at T2 where the power failure occurs when the state is shifted to the special state, and the power failure occurs. At the restored T3, the completed special state notification process is restarted. Further, when a power failure occurs during the light emission of the advantageous section LED 19, the advantageous section LED 19 is turned off, and when the power failure is restored, the light emission of the finished advantageous section LED 19 is restarted. Therefore, even if the power failure occurs in the special state, when the power failure is restored, the store clerk, the player, or the like can be made to recognize the special state. Further, even if a power failure occurs during the transition to the advantageous section, the player can be made to recognize that the section is advantageous when the power failure is restored.

(3-10) If the light emission time of 1 DG is shortened, even if the 1 DG emits light, the brightness due to the light emission becomes low, so that it looks dark to a player or the like. Then, it becomes difficult for the player or the like to recognize the information notified by the DG. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9, the light emitting unit is divided into a first DG group and a second DG group. Therefore, it is possible to secure the light emitting time of each of the light emitting unit included in the first DG group and the light emitting unit included in the second DG group. Therefore, the brightness due to the light emission of 1 DG can be guaranteed. Further, by adopting a configuration in which the DG is divided into DG groups, even if the DG increases due to, for example, improvement of the game machine, the brightness due to the light emission of the increased DG can be guaranteed. Further, as the number of the first DG group is 6 (DG1 to DG6) and the number of the second DG group is 4 (DG1 to DG4), the number of the first DG group and the number of the second DG group are Even if they are different, the selection signal DG1 to the selection signal DG4 can be shared between the first DG group and the second DG group. In other words, any one of DG1 to DG4 in the first DG group and any one of DG1 to DG4 in the second DG group can be selected by a common selection signal. Therefore, even if the DG increases due to the improvement of the game machine or the like, it is possible to prevent the number of selection signals from increasing too much.

(3-11) The light emitting unit included in the first DG group of FIG. 9 is a segment that constitutes each of the two 7-segment displays that make up the credit display, and each of the two 7-segment displays that make up the game auxiliary display. Includes the segments that make up the That is, the light emitting unit included in the first DG group is a light emitting unit that updates the light emitting state according to the progress of the game (so that the progress of the game can be specified).

On the other hand, the light emitting unit included in the second DG group includes a light emitting unit (segment) constituting each of the four 7-segment displays constituting the game information display. That is, the light emitting unit included in the second DG group is a light emitting unit different from the light emitting unit included in the first DG group. In other words, it is not a light emitting unit that updates the light emitting state according to the progress of the game (so that the progress of the game can be specified).

Therefore, the first DG group and the second DG group are separated depending on whether or not the light emitting state is updated according to the progress of the game. Therefore, the processing load of bit control of the main CPU 41a can be reduced.

(3-12) Further, when the selection signal DG5 or the selection signal DG6, which is the selection signal DG not shared between the first DG group and the second DG group, is output, the DG in the second DG group Non-emission bit control is performed so that none of the segments emit light. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the light emitting portion included in the second DG group, which should not emit light, from being erroneously emitted.

In addition, depending on the state, there is a DG that does not emit light. For example, in the normal state, DG6 of the first DG group is non-emission. The non-emission bit control is also executed for the first output port 61 of the non-emission DG6. As described above, the non-emission bit control is also executed by the bit control for the DG of the second DG group when the selection signal DG5 or the selection signal DG6 is output, and is also executed by the bit control for the DG which is regarded as non-emission depending on the state. To. Therefore, since the processing can be standardized, the processing load can be reduced.

(3-13) Further, as shown in the signal switching process described with reference to FIG. 10, first, the selection signal DG clear process (step ST1) for clearing the selection signal DG is executed. After the selection signal DG clearing process is completed, the light emitting signal of the first output port and the light emitting signal of the second output port are updated (step ST3, step ST5). After that, the selection signal DG is updated and set (step ST6). According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent erroneous light emission due to an error of the selected DG or the like by executing the selection signal DG clearing process or the like for clearing the selection signal DG.

(3-14) Further, the light emitting signal of the first output port is cleared in step ST2 before the light emitting signal of the first output port is updated and set. Further, the light emitting signal of the second output port is cleared in step ST4 before the light emitting signal of the second output port is updated and set. According to such a configuration, the light emitting portion included in the selected DG is erroneously emitted by executing the light emitting signal clearing process for clearing the light emitting signal of the first output port and the light emitting signal of the second output port. It can be prevented from being stowed.

Further, even when the selection signal DG5 or the selection signal DG6 is output, the light emission signal of the second output port 62 is cleared in the same manner as when any of the selection signal DG1 to the selection signal DG4 is output. The process (step ST4) and the update setting process (step ST5) of the light emission signal of the second output port 62 are executed. Therefore, the signal switching process can be standardized regardless of the type of the selection signal DG.

(3-15) Further, as shown in FIG. 9, among the eight output terminals of the first output port 61, the output terminal D7 is an unused output terminal. Further, in all the DGs included in the first DG group, all the light emitting units corresponding to the output terminal D7, which is an unused output terminal, are unused. No signal line is connected between the unused output terminal D7 and the light emitting unit corresponding to the output terminal D7. In other words, of the eight output terminals of the first output port 61, the unused output terminal D7 is not provided with a light emitting unit corresponding to any of the DGs (DG1 to DG6 of the first DG group). Therefore, it is possible to appropriately control the light emitting modes of all the light emitting units included in the first DG group, and to eliminate the need for wiring from the output terminal D7 of the first output port 61 to each of the DGs included in the first DG group. it can. Therefore, the wiring pattern can be simplified.

(3-16) Further, the first output port 61 is mounted on the game control board 40, the DGs 1 to DG5 included in the first DG group are mounted on the display board, and the DG6 included in the first DG group is mounted on the relay board. To. That is, the first output port 61 mounted on the game control board 40 includes an unused output terminal D7, and the unused output terminal D7 is any of DG1 to DG6 mounted on the display board and the relay board. The DG is also not provided with a corresponding light emitting unit. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the need for a wiring pattern from the unused output terminal D7 mounted on the game control board 40 to the light emitting unit included in each of the plurality of DGs. Therefore, the wiring pattern from the game control board 40 to the display board can be simplified, and the wiring pattern from the game control board 40 to the relay board can also be simplified.

(3-17) Further, DG1 to DG4 and DG6 of the first DG group are DGs (7-segment displays) for displaying numbers, respectively. Further, the DG 5 of the first DG group is a DG for displaying different game information from each of the plurality of LEDs constituting the DG 5. Since the role of the DG can be clarified in this way, the main CPU 41a can control the light emitting mode of the light emitting unit according to the role.

(3-18) Among the output terminals of the first output port 61, for the output terminals D0 to D6 to be used, bits (0 or 1) are set according to the light emitting unit to emit light. Further, regardless of which DG of DG1 to DG6 is selected by the selection signal DG, the bit control for the unused output terminal D7 of the first output port 61 is set to "0", which is a bit that does not emit light. Set. In this way, the light emitting signals S output from all eight output terminals D0 to D7 including the unused output terminals are generated. Therefore, the generation process of the light emitting signal S can be simplified as compared with the game machine which does not generate the signal from the unused output terminal but generates the light emitting signal S output from the output terminal other than the unused output terminal.

(3-19) Further, the unused output terminal D7 is an output terminal located on the end side of the eight output terminals. Therefore, since the unused output terminal D7 that does not require the wiring pattern is located on the end side, the wiring pattern can be simplified. Further, since the detection process for detecting while shifting the created 8-digit bit signal can be executed and the 8th-digit bit can be set to "0", the handling in the program can be facilitated.

(3-20) Further, as shown in FIG. 9, all the DGs in the first DG group have an unused light emitting portion, while all the DGs in the second DG group emit light that is unused. There is no part. As described above, in the present embodiment, the DG group is divided, that is, the output port is divided depending on whether or not there is an unused light emitting unit. Therefore, the bit control to the first output port 61 always sets "0" for the output terminal D7, while the bit control to the second output port 62 always sets "1" for the output terminal D7. .. Therefore, the output terminal D7 can fix the set number of bits in both the first output port 61 and the second output port. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the burden of bit control on the first output port 61 and bit control on the second output port 62.

(3-21) Further, the processing to the first output port 61 is executed in the in-capacity processing, and the processing to the second output port 62 is executed in the out-capacity processing. In this way, since the in-capacity processing and the out-capacity processing can be separated according to the output port, it is compared with the gaming machine in which the in-capacity processing and the out-capacity processing are mixed for one output port. , The processing load can be reduced.

(3-22) In the process of FIG. 10, a flowchart is created in which the clearing process of the light emitting signal of the output port is collectively executed, and then the update setting process of the light emitting signal of the output port is collectively executed, that is, step ST1 → It is also conceivable to configure a gaming machine (a fourth comparison target gaming machine) in which step ST2 → step ST4 → step ST3 → step ST5 → step ST6. However, when this configuration is adopted, the processing flow is as follows: in-capacity processing (step ST2) → out-of-capacity processing (step ST4) → in-capacity processing (step ST3) → out-of-capacity processing (step ST5). That is, the processing becomes complicated because the in-capacity processing and the out-capacity processing must be executed alternately.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, step ST2 and step ST3 are executed by the capacity processing, and steps ST4 and step ST5 are executed by the capacity processing, so that the game machine is compared with the fourth comparison target gaming machine. The process can be simplified.

In the present embodiment, in the signal switching process of FIG. 10, the process of clearing the selection signal DG and the light emission signal S has been described as a process of setting “0” for 8 bits. However, the process of clearing the selection signal DG and the light emission signal S may be a process of stopping the output of the selection signal DG and the light emission signal S.

In the present embodiment, it has been described that the number of DGs contained in the first DG group and the number of DGs contained in the second DG group are different. However, the number of DGs contained in the first DG group and the number of DGs contained in the second DG group may be the same. Even with such a configuration, the selection signal DG can be shared between the first DG group and the second DG group, which is an advantageous effect.

Further, in the present embodiment, the advantageous section LED 19 is exemplified as the LED for notifying that the LED has been shifted to the advantageous section. However, it is possible to shift to any of a plurality of types of advantageous sections as an advantageous section, and an LED corresponding to the type may be provided. For example, CZ (chance zone) and AT (assist time) may exist as advantageous sections. For example, as the advantageous section LED, a CZ lamp for notifying that the LED has been shifted to CZ and an AT lamp for notifying that the LED has been shifted to AT may be provided.

In the example of FIG. 9, for all the DGs included in the first DG group, one of the eight light emitting parts is unused. However, two or more unused DGs may be included for at least one DG among all the DGs included in the first DG group. Even with such a configuration, the same effect as that of the present embodiment can be obtained.

In the example of FIG. 10, as shown in FIG. 12 (D), it has been described that the number of LEDs to be turned off is two. However, the number of LEDs to be turned off may be three or more. In this case, it is preferable that the output terminals corresponding to the three or more LEDs to be turned off are adjacent to each other. Even with such a configuration, the same effect as that of the present embodiment can be obtained.

In the present embodiment, as shown in DG5 of the first DG group of FIG. 9, a predetermined event, that is, a set number of bets, being replayed, an advantageous section, and a start operation being effective. It was explained that all the medals that can be inserted are notified by the light emission of the LED. However, at least one of the predetermined events may be notified by other means together with the light emission of the LED or in place of the light emission of the LED. The other means is, for example, at least one of a liquid crystal display 51 capable of displaying predetermined information and a sound output means capable of outputting predetermined sound.

In the present embodiment, the light emitting unit corresponding to the output terminal is made to emit light by outputting the light emitting signal from the output terminal of the output port, and the light emitting signal is not output from the output terminal, thereby corresponding to the output terminal. It has been described that the light emitting part is not made to emit light. However, other control may be used to switch between light emission and non-light emission of the light emitting unit. For example, by not outputting the non-emission signal from the output terminal of the output port, the light emitting unit corresponding to the output terminal is made to emit light, and by outputting the non-emission signal from the output terminal, the light emission corresponding to the output terminal is emitted. You may not let the part emit light.

It has been described that all of the plurality of light emitting units of the present embodiment either emit light or turn off. However, there may be two or more types of light emitting modes of at least one light emitting unit among the plurality of light emitting units. For example, at least one light emitting unit among the plurality of light emitting units may be capable of emitting light to any of the plurality of colors. For example, the light emitting unit may be capable of emitting light in red or may be capable of emitting light in blue. In this case, the light emitting signal that specifies the light emitting mode of the light emitting unit may be a signal that specifies the light emitting color.

As a conventional game machine, when a small winning combination is won and a predetermined number of medals are paid out as a result of playing a game, the number of medals to be paid out (the number of medals to be paid out) is displayed on the payout display unit. After that, the display of the payout display unit is controlled to "0" and the number of payouts is displayed by elapse of a predetermined predetermined time without performing the BET operation for starting the next game. There is a configuration to terminate.

In a game machine having such a configuration, after displaying the number of medals to be paid out on the payout display unit at the end of the game, a predetermined time elapses without performing a BET operation or a BET operation as an end condition. By controlling to end the display of the number of payouts by satisfying the above, the same end condition is uniformly satisfied regardless of the situation of the game, and the display of the number of payouts is ended. is there.

On the other hand, the slot machine 1 which is the game machine of the present embodiment has display devices such as a game auxiliary display 12 for displaying the number of medals paid out due to the occurrence of a prize, and displays thereof. A main control unit 41 that controls the equipment is provided, and the main control unit 41 starts a control for displaying the number of medals to be paid out as information about the game on the game auxiliary display 12 when the game is completed. As a result, after the game is completed, the game auxiliary display 12 can be used to notify the number of payouts. Then, when the main control unit 41 notifies the number of medals to be paid out as information about the game by the game auxiliary display 12 after the last game in the BB is completed as a predetermined state, the first condition is the BB. When it is established that the control is terminated, the notification of the game-related information by the game auxiliary display 12 is terminated. Further, the main control unit 41 performs a game after the predetermined game different from the last game in the BB in the predetermined state (a game in a normal state not controlled by the BB or a game other than the last game in the BB) is completed. When the auxiliary display 12 is notified of the number of medals to be paid out as information about the game, the second condition (effective operation of the start switch 7 for starting the game) different from the first condition is satisfied. When it is established, the game auxiliary display 12 ends the notification of information about the game.

According to this configuration, after the game is completed, the slot machine 1 can notify the number of medals to be paid out as information about the game by the game auxiliary display 12, and the last game in the BB as a predetermined state. Then, after the end of the game, when the first condition (the control of the BB is terminated) is satisfied, the notification of the information regarding the game by the game auxiliary display 12 is terminated, while the last game in the BB Is a different predetermined game (a game in a normal state not controlled by the BB or a game other than the last game in the BB), after the end of the predetermined game, the second condition (the start switch 7 for starting the game is valid). When the operation is performed), the notification of the game-related information by the game auxiliary display 12 is terminated. Therefore, the BB in a predetermined state is determined by the difference in the timing at which the notification by the game auxiliary display 12 is terminated. It is possible to specify whether it is the last game or a predetermined game in.

Further, the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment includes LEDs such as 1-3 BETLEDs 14 to 16 that notify the set bet number by lighting, and a main control unit 41 that controls these LEDs. Before the game is started, the main control unit 41 inserts medals from the medal insertion unit 4 or operates the MAXBET switch 6 to set the bet number, and the 1 to 3 BETLED 14 corresponding to the bet number is set. By starting lighting of ~ 16 and continuing lighting of 1-3 BETLEDs 14 to 16 even after the end of the game, the number of bets set by using 1-3 BETLEDs 14 to 16 is notified after the game is completed. It is a configuration that can be made to. Then, when the main control unit 41 notifies the number of bets set as information about the game by 1-3 BETLEDs 14 to 16 after the last game in the BB is completed as a predetermined state, as the first condition. When it is established that the control of the BB is terminated, the notification of the information regarding the game by the 1-3 BETLEDs 14 to 16 is terminated. Further, after the predetermined game different from the last game in the BB in the predetermined state (a game in the normal state not controlled by the BB or a game other than the last game in the BB) is completed, the main control unit 41 1 When the number of bets set as information about the game is notified by 3BETLEDs 14 to 16, a second condition different from the first condition (a medal is inserted from the medal insertion unit 4 or the MAXBET switch 6 is set). When (operated) is established, the notification of information regarding the game by the 1 to 3 BETLEDs 14 to 16 is terminated.

According to this configuration, after the game is completed, the slot machine 1 can notify the number of bets set as information about the game by 1 to 3 BETLEDs 14 to 16, and is the last in the BB as a predetermined state. In the game of, when the first condition (the control of the BB is terminated) is satisfied after the end of the game, the notification of the information regarding the game by the 1 to 3 BETLEDs 14 to 16 is terminated, while the last in the BB. In a predetermined game different from the game (a game in a normal state not controlled by the BB or a game other than the last game in the BB), after the end of the predetermined game, the second condition (a new bet number is determined by the player's predetermined operation). Is set), the notification of information about the game by the 1st to 3rd BETLEDs 14 to 16 is terminated. Therefore, the BB in a predetermined state depends on the difference in the timing at which the notifications by the 1st to 3rd BETLEDs 14 to 16 are terminated. It is possible to specify whether it is the last game or a predetermined game in.

In the present embodiment, the slot machine 1 has a configuration that can be controlled by the BB as a predetermined state, and is a predetermined game different from the last game in the BB, that is, all the games in the normal state that are not controlled by the BB, and For all games other than the last game in BB, the second condition (depending on the player) when the information about the game (the number of medals paid out, the set number of bets) is notified after the game is completed. When the predetermined operation is performed), the notification of the information about the game is terminated, but all the games in the normal state not controlled by the BB and all the games other than the last game in the BB. For some of the games, for example, all games other than the last game in BB, or the game immediately before the last game in BB, information about the game is notified after the game is completed. If the second condition is satisfied, the notification of information about the game may be terminated. Even in such a configuration, as in the present embodiment, whether it is the last game in a predetermined state or a predetermined game depending on the difference in the timing at which the notification by the game auxiliary display 12 or 1-3 BETLED 14 to 16 is completed. Can be identified.

Further, in the present embodiment, the slot machine 1 is configured to be controllable to the BB as a predetermined state, but is advantageous to a player other than the BB as a predetermined state, for example, from the RB, the advantageous section, or the normal state. In addition, a state in which the winning of the advantageous section lottery is easily controlled (chance zone (CZ), etc.), a state in which the winning probability of the replaying combination is higher in the internal lottery than in the normal state (RT), and the like may be applied.

Further, in the present embodiment, at the end of a predetermined game different from the last game in BB, initialization processing at the end of the game is performed to create display data set in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12. When a predetermined area of the RAM 41c in which data relating to the number of payouts is stored is initialized, and then the start switch 7 is operated with a predetermined number of bets set, the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 By initializing the predetermined area of the RAM 41c in which is set, the notification of the number of payouts on the game auxiliary display 12 is terminated, and at the end of the last game in the BB, the initialization process at the end of the game is performed. Then, the predetermined area of the RAM 41c in which the data related to the number of payouts is stored is initialized, and then the initialization process at the end of BB is performed, and the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 is set based on the initialization table. By initializing the predetermined area of the RAM 41c, the notification of the number of payouts in the game auxiliary display 12 is terminated, that is, the data regarding the number of payouts which is the basis for creating the display data, and the game auxiliary display 12. The configuration is such that the display data set in the output buffer is initialized at different timings, but the data related to the number of payouts and the display data are initialized at the same timing to notify the number of payouts on the game auxiliary display 12. It may be configured to be terminated.

Further, in the present embodiment, at the end of a predetermined game different from the last game in the BB and the last game in the BB, the game assistance display is also displayed when the notification of the number of bets set by 1-3 BETLEDs 14 to 16 is terminated. Similar to when the notification of the number of payouts by the device 12 is terminated, the data regarding the set number of bets that is the basis for creating the display data set in the output buffers of 1-3 BETLED 14 to 16 and the 1 to 3 BETLED 14 to 16 The display data set in the output buffer of 16 is initialized at different timings, but the set bet number data and the display data are initialized at the same timing, and 1-3 BETLEDs 14 to 16 are initialized. The notification of the number of bets set in the above may be terminated.

The main control unit 41 of the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment can pay out a predetermined number of medals to be paid out by generating a small winning combination at the end of the game, and the game ends. When a small winning combination is awarded, the game auxiliary display 12 displays the number of medals to be paid out in connection with the small winning combination as information about the game on the game auxiliary display 12. It is a configuration that can be notified, and as information on the game, the number of medals to be paid out in connection with the winning of the small winning combination is notified by the game auxiliary display 12.

According to this configuration, when the game is completed, the main control unit 41 can notify the game auxiliary display 12 of the number of medals paid out in the game as information about the game. It is possible to make the player or the like of the number of medals paid out as a result of the game recognize.

The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a start switch 7 that is operated when the player starts a game, and is different from the last game in the BB in the predetermined state (in a normal state not controlled by the BB). After the game or the game other than the last game in the BB) is completed, when the game auxiliary display 12 is notified of the number of medals to be paid out as information about the game, the specified number of bets is set as the second condition. When the start switch 7 is operated in the set state, that is, the effective operation of the start switch 7 for starting the game is established, the information regarding the game by the game auxiliary display 12 can be obtained. The configuration is such that the notification is terminated.

According to this configuration, after the predetermined game is completed, when the game auxiliary display 12 notifies the number of medals to be paid out as information about the game, the game auxiliary display 12 is operated until the start switch 7 is operated. It is possible to continue the notification of information related to the game by the operation of the start switch 7, and the notification is terminated when the second condition is satisfied by the operation of the start switch 7. Therefore, the player is informed that the notification is terminated by the operation of the start switch 7. Can be recognized.

Further, the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a MAXBET switch 6 operated by a player to set a bet number when starting a game, and is different from the last game in the BB in a predetermined state (a predetermined game (). After the game in the normal state not controlled by the BB or the game other than the last game in the BB) is completed, when the 1 to 3 BETLEDs 14 to 16 are notified of the bet number set as the information related to the game. As a second condition, the MAXBET switch 6 is operated, that is, a new bet number for starting the next game is set by a predetermined operation by the player, and the 1 to 3 BETLEDs 14 to 16 are used. It is configured to end the notification of information about the game.

According to this configuration, after the predetermined game is completed, 1 to 3 BETLED 14 to 1 to 3 BETLED 14 to 16 until the MAXBET switch 6 is operated when the number of bets set as information about the game is notified by 1-3 BETLED 14 to 16. It is possible to continue the notification of the information related to the game by the operations of to 16, and the notification is terminated when the second condition is satisfied by the operation of the MAXBET switch 6. Therefore, the game that the notification is terminated by the operation of the MAXBET switch 6. Can be recognized by others.

Further, the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment includes insertion medal sensors 31a to 31c for detecting medals inserted by the player from the medal insertion unit 4, and is a predetermined game (BB) different from the last game in the BB in the predetermined state. After the game in the normal state that is not controlled by the player or the game other than the last game in the BB is completed, the 1st to 3rd BETLEDs 14 to 16 are notified of the bet number set as the information related to the game. As two conditions, it is established that medals are detected by the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c, that is, a bet number setting operation is performed in which the player inserts medals from the medal insertion unit 4 and sets the bet number. , 1-3 BETLEDs 14 to 16 are configured to end the notification of information regarding the game.

According to this configuration, after the predetermined game is completed, when the number of bets set as information about the game is notified by 1-3 BETLEDs 14 to 16, the bet number setting operation by inserting medals by the player can be performed. Until this is done, the notification of information about the game can be continued by the 1 to 3 BETLEDs 14 to 16, and the notification is terminated when the second condition is satisfied by the bet number setting operation by inserting the medal. It is possible to make the player recognize that the notification has been completed by the operation.

The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a RAM 41c having a storage area capable of storing data and a main control unit 41 capable of initializing the storage area in the RAM 41c, and the main control unit 41 is at the end of a predetermined game. The configuration is such that a predetermined area of the RAM 41c is initialized at the end of the last game in the BB and the area of the storage area of the RAM 41c that is initialized at the end of the predetermined game and the initial area at the end of the last game in the BB. It has a different configuration from the area to be converted.

According to this feature, an appropriate area can be initialized depending on whether it is the end of the last game in the BB or the end of a predetermined game.

The main control unit 41 of the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment displays the bit control data of the game auxiliary display 12 for displaying the game auxiliary display 12 based on the payout number data stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c. By setting it in the buffer, it is possible to notify the game auxiliary display 12 of the number of medals to be paid out as information about the game, and the main control unit 41 is at the end of the predetermined game and the end of the last game in the BB. At times, it is possible to initialize a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, respectively, and in the initialization of the RAM 41c at the end of the last game in the BB, the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is initialized based on a predetermined initialization table. In the area of the RAM 41c, which is configured and initialized based on the initialization table, the payout number data and the bit control data, which are data for notifying the payout number of medals as information about the game by the game auxiliary display 12, are stored. It is a configuration that includes the area to be used.

According to this configuration, the main control unit 41 initializes the BB at the end of the last game, so that the game auxiliary display 12 can also end the notification of information about the game.

Further, the main control unit 41 of the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment transfers the bit control data of 1 to 3 BETLEDs 14 to 16 to the 1 to 3 BETLEDs 14 to 16 based on the bet number data stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c. By setting it in the display buffer, it is possible to notify the number of bets set as information about the game by 1-3 BETLEDs 14 to 16, and the main control unit 41 is at the end of the predetermined game and at the end of the BB. It is possible to initialize the predetermined area of the RAM 41c at the end of each game, and in the initialization of the RAM 41c at the end of the last game in the BB, the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is based on a predetermined initialization table. Is configured to initialize the bet number data, which is data for notifying the area of the RAM 41c that is initialized based on the initialization table the bet number set as information related to the game by the 1 to 3 BETLEDs 14 to 16. And the configuration includes an area for storing bit control data.

According to this configuration, the main control unit 41 initializes the BB at the end of the last game, so that the notification of information about the game by the 1 to 3 BETLEDs 14 to 16 can also be ended.

The slot machine 1 which is the gaming machine of the present embodiment controls indicators such as a game auxiliary indicator 12 for displaying the number of medals paid out due to the occurrence of a prize, and controls of these indicators. A main control unit 41 is provided, and when the game is completed, the main control unit 41 starts a control for displaying the number of medals to be paid out as information about the game on the game auxiliary display 12, so that the game can be played. After the game is completed, the game auxiliary display 12 can be used to notify the number of payouts. Then, when the main control unit 41 notifies the number of medals to be paid out as information about the game by the game auxiliary display 12 after the last game in the BB is completed as the first predetermined state, as the first condition. When it is established that the control of the BB is terminated, the notification of the information regarding the game by the game auxiliary display 12 is terminated. Further, when the main control unit 41 notifies the game auxiliary display 12 of the number of medals to be paid out as information on the game after the last game in the CB is completed as the second predetermined state, the first condition is met. Is configured to end the notification of information about the game by the game auxiliary display 12 when a different second condition (effective operation of the start switch 7 for starting the game is performed) is satisfied.

According to this configuration, after the game is completed, the slot machine 1 can notify the number of medals to be paid out as information about the game by the game auxiliary display 12, and is the last in the BB as the first predetermined state. In the game of, when the first condition (the control of the BB is terminated) is satisfied after the end of the game, the notification of the information about the game by the game auxiliary display 12 is terminated, while the second predetermined state is satisfied. In the final game in the CB as a game, after the end of the game, a second condition (effective operation of the start switch 7 for starting the game) different from the first condition is satisfied, so that the game is played. Since the notification of the game-related information by the auxiliary display 12 is terminated, it may be the last game in the BB which is the first predetermined state or the second predetermined state depending on the difference in the timing when the notification by the game auxiliary display 12 is terminated. It is possible to identify whether it is the last game in the state CB.

Further, the slot machine 1 which is the gaming machine of the present embodiment includes LEDs such as 1 to 3 BET LEDs 14 to 16 that notify the set bet number by lighting, and a main control unit 41 that controls these LEDs. The main control unit 41 responds to the number of bets when the number of bets is set by inserting medals from the medal insertion unit 4 or operating the MAXBET switch 6 before the game is started. By starting the lighting of the 1st to 3rd BETLEDs 14 to 16 and continuing the lighting of the 1st to 3rd BETLEDs 14 to 16 even after the end of the game, the 1st to 3rd BETLEDs 14 to 16 are set after the game is completed. It is a configuration that can notify the number of bets. Then, when the main control unit 41 notifies the number of bets set as information about the game by 1-3 BETLEDs 14 to 16 after the last game in the BB is completed as the first predetermined state, the first When it is established that the control of the BB is terminated as a condition, the notification of the information regarding the game by the 1 to 3 BETLEDs 14 to 16 is terminated. Further, when the main control unit 41 notifies the 1 to 3 BETLEDs 14 to 16 of the number of bets set as information about the game after the last game in the CB is completed as the second predetermined state, the first When the second condition different from the condition (the medal is inserted from the medal insertion unit 4 or the MAXBET switch 6 is operated) is satisfied, the notification of the game information by the 1 to 3 BETLEDs 14 to 16 is terminated. is there.

According to this configuration, after the game is completed, the slot machine 1 can notify the number of bets set as information about the game by 1 to 3 BETLEDs 14 to 16, and the BB as the first predetermined state. In the last game in the above, after the end of the game, the first condition (the control of the BB is terminated) is satisfied, so that the notification of the information related to the game by the 1-3 BETLEDs 14 to 16 is terminated, while the second In the final game in the CB as a predetermined state, after the end of the game, a second condition different from the first condition (a medal is inserted from the medal insertion unit 4 or the MAXBET switch 6 is operated) is satisfied. As a result, the notification of information about the game by the 1st to 3rd BETLEDs 14 to 16 is terminated. Therefore, depending on the difference in the timing at which the notification by the 1st to 3rd BETLEDs 14 to 16 is terminated, is it the last game in the BB which is the first predetermined state? , It is possible to specify whether it is the last game in the CB which is the second predetermined state.

In the present embodiment, the slot machine 1 has a configuration in which it can be controlled by the BB as the first predetermined state and can be controlled by the RB as the second predetermined state, but the BB as the first predetermined state and the second predetermined state. In an advantageous state for players other than RB and RB, for example, an advantageous section, a state in which it is easier to win a lottery in an advantageous section than in a normal state (chance zone (CZ), etc.) A state (RT) in which the winning probability of the re-game combination is increased may be applied.

Further, in the present embodiment, the slot machine 1 has a configuration in which the slot machine 1 can be controlled by the BB as the first predetermined state and can be controlled by the CB as the second predetermined state, that is, different types of the first predetermined state and the second predetermined state. Although the configuration can be controlled to a state, a configuration in which at least one of the advantage, the end condition, and the control in the predetermined state is different as the first predetermined state and the second predetermined state may be applied, for example. As the first predetermined state and the second predetermined state, the same type of states having different advantages (for example, a first BB that can be controlled by the AT after the end, a second BB that is not controlled by the AT after the end, and an AT after the end 1st RB that can be controlled by, 2nd RB that is not controlled by AT after the end, 1st advantageous section and 2nd advantageous section with different number of controlled games, 1st CZ and 2nd CZ with different number of controlled games Etc.) may be applied.

The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a start switch 7 that is operated when the player starts a game, and after the last game in the CB in the second predetermined state is completed, the game is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12. When the number of medals to be paid out is notified as information regarding, as a second condition, the start switch 7 is operated with the specified number of bets set, that is, the start for starting the game. When it is established that the switch 7 is effectively operated, the game auxiliary display 12 ends the notification of information about the game.

According to this configuration, after the last game in the CB in the second predetermined state is completed, the start switch 7 is operated when the game auxiliary display 12 notifies the number of medals to be paid out as information about the game. The notification of information about the game can be continued by the game auxiliary display 12, and the notification is terminated when the second condition is satisfied by the operation of the start switch 7. Therefore, the notification is performed by the operation of the start switch 7. Can be made to recognize that the player has finished.

Further, the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a MAXBET switch 6 operated by a player to set a bet number when starting a game, and the last game in CB, which is a second predetermined state, is completed. After that, when the 1 to 3 BETLEDs 14 to 16 are notified of the bet number set as the information about the game, the MAXBET switch 6 is operated as the second condition, that is, the next game is performed by the predetermined operation by the player. When it is established that a new bet number for starting the game is set, the notification of the game information by the 1 to 3 BETLEDs 14 to 16 is terminated.

According to this configuration, after the game in the CB in the second predetermined state is completed, the MAXBET switch 6 is operated when the number of bets set as the information related to the game is notified by the 1 to 3 BETLEDs 14 to 16. Until this is done, the notification of information about the game can be continued by the operation of the 1st to 3rd BETLEDs 14 to 16, and the notification is terminated when the second condition is satisfied by the operation of the MAXBET switch 6, so that the notification is performed by the operation of the MAXBET switch 6. Can be made to recognize that the player has finished.

Further, the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment includes insertion medal sensors 31a to 31c for detecting medals inserted by the player from the medal insertion unit 4, after the last game in the CB in the second predetermined state is completed. , 1-3 BETLEDs 14 to 16 are notified of the number of bets set as information about the game, and as a second condition, medals are detected by the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c, that is, the player inserts medals. When the bet number setting operation for inserting medals and setting the bet number is performed from the unit 4, the notification of the game information by the 1 to 3 BETLEDs 14 to 16 is terminated.

According to this configuration, after the last game in the CB, which is the second predetermined state, is completed, when the number of bets set as the information about the game is notified by 1 to 3 BETLEDs 14 to 16, the player determines the bet number. Until the bet number setting operation by inserting medals is performed, the notification of the game information by 1-3 BETLED 14 to 16 can be continued, and the notification is made when the second condition is satisfied by the bet number setting operation by inserting medals. Is terminated, so that the player can be made aware that the notification has been terminated by the bet number setting operation.

The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a RAM 41c having a storage area capable of storing data and a main control unit 41 capable of initializing the storage area in the RAM 41c, and the main control unit 41 is in a second predetermined state. At the end of the last game in a certain CB, the first area of the storage area of the RAM 41c is initialized, and at the end of the last game in the BB which is the first predetermined state, the RAM 41c is based on a predetermined initialization table. It is a configuration that initializes a second area of the storage area, which is different from the first area.

According to this configuration, the main control unit 41 has a first area of the RAM 41c that is initialized at the end of the last game in the BB in the first predetermined state and at the end of the last game in the CB in the second predetermined state. Initializes the second area of the different RAM 41c, so that the area that is not initialized at the end of the last game in the BB and the area that is not initialized at the end of the last game in the CB can be initialized.

The main control unit 41 of the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment displays the bit control data of the game auxiliary display 12 for displaying the game auxiliary display 12 based on the payout number data stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c. By setting it in the buffer, it is possible to notify the game auxiliary display 12 of the number of medals to be paid out as information about the game, and the main control unit 41 ends the last game in the BB which is the first predetermined state. It is possible to initialize the predetermined area of the RAM 41c at the end of the last game in the time and the second predetermined state of the CB, respectively, and the initialization of the RAM 41c at the end of the last game in the BB is predetermined. The second area of the RAM 41c is initialized based on the initialization table, and the second area of the RAM 41c, which is initialized based on the initialization table, is stored in the second area of the RAM 41c as information about the game by the game auxiliary display 12. The configuration includes an area for storing the payout number data and the bit control data, which are data for notifying the payout number.

According to this configuration, the main control unit 41 initializes the BB at the end of the last game, so that the game auxiliary display 12 can also end the notification of information about the game.

Further, the main control unit 41 of the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment transfers the bit control data of 1 to 3 BETLEDs 14 to 16 to the 1 to 3 BETLEDs 14 to 16 based on the bet number data stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c. By setting it in the display buffer, it is possible to notify the number of bets set as information about the game by 1 to 3 BETLEDs 14 to 16, and the main control unit 41 is the last in the BB which is the first predetermined state. It is possible to initialize the predetermined area of the RAM 41c at the end of the game and at the end of the last game in the CB which is the second predetermined state, respectively, and in the initialization of the RAM 41c at the end of the last game in the BB. , The second area of the RAM 41c is initialized based on a predetermined initialization table, and the second area of the RAM 41c initialized based on the initialization table is set in the second area of the RAM 41c by 1-3 BETLEDs 14 to 16. The configuration includes an area for storing bet number data and bit control data, which are data for notifying the bet number set as information.

According to this configuration, the main control unit 41 initializes the BB at the end of the last game, so that the notification of information about the game by the 1 to 3 BETLEDs 14 to 16 can also be ended.

(About result notification)
In the present embodiment, the result notification is performed in the production mode shown in FIG. 18, but the result notification may be performed in another production mode. For example, FIGS. 21 and 22 are diagrams for explaining an effect at the time of result notification during freezing for a modified example.

First, the effect mode shown in FIG. 21 will be described. As shown in FIG. 21, after the door closing effect is completed by the effect shown in FIG. 17 (i), the spark image 51c appears from the edge of the screen as shown in FIG. 21 (j2). When the spark image 51c appears, the speakers 53 and 54 output a "flickering" sound as if sparks appeared.

As shown in FIG. 22 (k2), the spark image 51c appearing from the edge of the screen moves to the center portion of the screen. At this time, the speakers 53 and 54 output a "viewn" sound as if sparks were moving. The bonus lamp 26 starts to turn off and the brightness decreases, while the side lamp 27 keeps lighting or blinking in a mode for result notification.

As shown in FIG. 22 (l2), the spark image 51c that has moved from the edge of the screen stops at the center portion of the screen. At this time, the speakers 53 and 54 output a "bonk" sound like sparks. The brightness of the bonus lamp 26 is further reduced, while the side lamp 27 keeps lighting or blinking in a mode for notifying the result.

As shown in FIG. 22 (n2), the result image 51d is displayed in the central portion of the screen where the spark image 51c was displayed. As a result, the player is notified that the number of acquired sheets is 304. At this time, the speakers 53 and 54 output a "deep" sound. The bonus lamp 26 is completely turned off, while the side lamp 27 keeps lighting or blinking in a result notification mode.

As shown in FIG. 22 (о2), after the result image 51d is displayed, a caution display for alerting the player regarding the game is performed. When the alert image is displayed, the alert image 51e is displayed above the result image 51d. By performing such a warning display, it is possible to suppress excessive games for the player.

In this way, since the spark image 51c moves from the edge of the screen toward the central portion, attention can be focused on the moving spark image 51c, and the result image is displayed in the spark image area where the spark image 51c is displayed. Since 51d is also displayed, attention can be drawn to the resulting image 51d.

Next, the effect mode shown in FIG. 22 will be described. As shown in FIG. 22 (j3), the first spark image 51g and the second spark image 51h are displayed in the central portion of the screen. At this time, the speakers 53 and 54 output a "bonk" sound like sparks.

As shown in FIG. 22 (k3), the result image 51d showing the number of acquired images is displayed in the portion where the first spark image 51g is displayed. Further, in the portion where the second spark image 51h is displayed, the result image 51f showing the number of digestion games in the bonus is displayed. The bonus lamp 26 starts to turn off and the brightness decreases, while the side lamp 27 keeps lighting or blinking in a mode for result notification.

As shown in FIG. 22 (l3), the first digit (in this example, the number "4") is displayed in the result image 51d. Further, in the result image 51f, the first digit (in this example, the number "2") is displayed. A "pin" sound is output from the speakers 53 and 54 along with the display of the first digit. The brightness of the bonus lamp 26 is further reduced, while the side lamp 27 keeps lighting or blinking in a mode for notifying the result.

As shown in FIG. 22 (m3), the second digit (in this example, the number "0") is then displayed in the result image 51d. Further, in the result image 51f, the second digit (in this example, the number "5") is displayed. Along with the display of the second digit, a "pin" sound is output from the speakers 53 and 54. The bonus lamp 26 is completely turned off, while the side lamp 27 keeps lighting or blinking in a result notification mode.

As shown in FIG. 22 (n3), the third digit (in this example, the number "3") is then displayed in the result image 51d. Further, in the result image 51f, the third digit (in this example, the number "1") is displayed. Along with the display of the third digit, a "pin" sound is output from the speakers 53 and 54.

By displaying the third digit in the result image 51d, the player is notified that the number of acquired images is 304 as the final result. Further, by displaying the third digit in the result image 51f, the player is notified that the number of digested games is 152G as a final result.

After the final results are displayed in the result image 51d and the result image 51f, as shown in FIG. 22 (о3), a caution display for alerting the player regarding the game is performed. When the alert image is displayed, the alert image 51e is displayed above the result image 51d and the result image 51f. By performing such a warning display, it is possible to suppress excessive games for the player.

In this way, the result image 51d indicating the number of acquired images is displayed in the portion where the first spark image 51g is displayed, and the result image 51e indicating the number of digestion games is displayed in the portion where the second spark image 51h is displayed. Therefore, the display of each result image can be made conspicuous, and the result image can be attracted attention.

In the example of FIG. 22, the first spark image 51g and the second spark image 51h may appear on the screen in order. For example, the second spark image 51h may appear after the first spark image 51g appears. Further, the result image 51d and the result image 51e may appear on the screen in order. For example, the result image 51e may appear after the result image 51d appears.

In this way, since the plurality of result images are displayed stepwise, it is possible to attract the attention of the player for each of the plurality of result images.

Further, in the result notifications shown in FIGS. 18, 21, and 22, when the number of acquired cards and the number of digested games are notified in order from the first digit, for example, the reel rotates in a 5-digit area. The numbers may be rotating. Then, while the numbers are rotating in the 5-digit area, the number of acquired games and the number of digested games are notified by gradually stopping the numbers in the order of the 1st digit, the 2nd digit, and the 3rd digit. There may be.

In this way, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize the final number of digits when displaying the result image, so the game is expected to have what the final number of digits will be. Can be embraced by others.

In addition, since the number of digits (for example, 5 digits) larger than the number of digits of the final number (for example, 3 digits) fluctuates, the number of digits of the final number is displayed. It can make the player think as if it were a number.

In addition, when the first digit number is displayed and when the second digit number is displayed, common control is performed such that the numbers in the remaining digits fluctuate, thus reducing the processing load. be able to.

In the above example, the number of acquired games and the number of digested games in the bonus are illustrated as the result notified by the result image. However, the result notified by the result image is a result that other players are interested in (for example, the number of acquired games and the number of digested games in the advantageous section, the number of acquired games and the number of digested games during AT, etc. As long as it is a result), any result may be used.

In the above example, the resulting image has been described as one or two images. However, the result image may be an image of 3 or more that can specify the numerical value updated according to the progress of the game in the advantageous state.

Further, the result image is not limited to such a numerical value, and may be a result image based on the end of the advantageous state. The result image may be, for example, information that can identify that the advantageous state has ended, for example, a character such as "end". Thus, the result image is an image that is displayed in connection with the bonus or the end of the AT.

In the above example, the door closing effect is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and other effects such as an effect in which a predetermined character is displayed may be used. In any case, it is preferable that these effects are completed by the time the result image is displayed. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player's attention to the display of the result image from being hindered.

At least one display mode such as an image, a background image, a result image, and a spark image in a door closing effect is used to notify (suggest) the degree of expectation that the advantageous state will continue (for example, the revival of AT). May be good. For example, if at least one color of the background image, the result image, and the spark image is the first color, there is a high expectation that the advantageous state will continue, and at least one color of the background image, the result image, and the spark image is the first color. If there are two colors, the degree of expectation that the advantageous state will continue may be low. With such a configuration, the player's attention can be drawn to at least one display mode of the background image, the result image, and the spark image.

In the above example, it was explained that the 5-digit number fluctuates regardless of the number of A digested games displayed as the result image and the number of digits of each acquired number, but only the number of digits corresponding to the number of digested games and the number of acquired numbers It may be changed.

(About the advantageous section after the bonus ends)
In the game after the end of the bonus as shown in FIG. 19 (u), there may be a case where the game is controlled by the AT and a case where the game is not controlled by the AT. Specifically, the advantageous section (CZ or AT) is won by the bonus winning or the rare combination winning before the bonus winning, and the advantageous section LED19 is lit in the bonus while being controlled to the advantageous section. Then, after the end of the bonus, the advantageous section LED19 continues to light up when the advantageous section continues, while the advantageous section LED19 lights up when the bonus ends when the advantageous section shifts to the normal section without continuing. Turns off. The slot machine 1 is designed so that even if the advantageous section LED 19 shifts to the normal section and the advantageous section LED 19 turns off when the bonus ends, the slot machine 1 shifts to the advantageous section again and the advantageous section LED 19 lights up within a predetermined number of games. May be good. For example, after the bonus ends, when the push order combination (for example, push order bell) that wins with a probability of 1 / 1.5 wins in the internal lottery, it shifts to the advantageous section again and the advantageous section LED 19 lights up. May be good. Alternatively, if the advantageous section continues after the end of the bonus, it is controlled by the CZ after the end of the bonus and shifts from the CZ to the AT within 10 games, during which the advantageous section LED19 continues to light and the advantageous section does not continue. In that case, after the end of the bonus, the advantage section LED19 shifts to the normal section and the advantageous section LED19 is temporarily turned off, but the advantageous section LED19 may be turned on again within 10 games by being controlled to the advantageous section (CZ or AT).

In this way, the slot machine 1 may be configured as follows.

A variable display unit (for example, reels 2L, 2C, 2R) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of types of identification information (for example, a symbol) that can be identified by each is provided.
In a slot machine (for example, slot machine 1) in which a display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display unit after the variable display unit is variablely displayed and a prize can be generated according to the display result.
A winning notification means for notifying the occurrence of a winning (for example, a winning notification shown in FIG. 16C) (for example, a process for performing a winning notification by the sub control unit 91).
A result display means (for example, a process of performing a result notification by the sub-control unit 91) for displaying a result image (for example, the result image 51d shown in FIG. 18) showing the result of the game in a specific state (for example, a big bonus).
A state transition means (for example, a process of controlling the state by the main control unit 41) for shifting the state from the specific state to a special state (for example, RT) after the end of the specific state.
Delay control means (for example, processing for performing freeze control by the main control unit 41) that performs delay control (for example, freeze control) that delays the progress of the game, and
A process of displaying a warning display means (for example, a process of displaying a warning by the main control unit 41) for displaying a warning image (for example, the warning image 51e shown in FIG. 18 (о)) for calling the player about the game. )When,
A notification means (for example, a game auxiliary display 12) capable of notifying information (for example, the number of payouts) and
It is provided with a suggestion means (for example, advantageous section LED19) for executing a suggestion effect suggesting that the control is performed in an advantageous section (for example, CZ or AT) that is more advantageous than the normal section.
When a specific display result (for example, 7 sets of symbol combinations) is derived, the state shifts to the specific state (for example, as shown in FIG. 14, a bonus is obtained by deriving 7 sets of symbol combinations). Winning will occur),
The delay control is performed when the specific display result is derived (for example, as shown in FIG. 14 (c), the freeze starts when a set of 7 symbol combinations is derived and the third stop release is performed. ), It is suggested that the state shifts to the specific state during the execution of the delay control (for example, as shown in FIGS. 14C to 14F, a bonus winning notification is performed during the freeze). After the delay control ends, an effect that causes the player to select the effect state in the specific state is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 15 (G), the bonus effect is selected after the freeze ends).
When the winning notification is performed in a game in which the specific state ends (for example, the final game in the bonus), the delay control is performed after the winning notification ends (for example, the winning notification shown in FIG. 16C). (Freeze starts as shown in FIG. 17 (e)), and the alert image is displayed together with the result image during the execution of the delay control (for example, FIGS. 18 (k) to 18 (о). ), The result notification is performed during the freeze, and the warning display is performed), and when the delay control ends, the display of the warning image ends (for example, as shown in FIG. 19 (p)). As shown in FIG. 19 (q) and (r), the alert display ends at the boundary of the whiteout), suggesting a transition to the special state after the end of the delay control (for example, RT after the end of freeze as shown in FIGS. The production is selected (see Fig. 20),
The advantageous section includes the special state (eg, becomes an advantageous section during the bonus).
When the special state ends, the suggestion effect continues to be executed without shifting from the advantageous section to the normal section (for example, when the advantageous section continues to light after the end of the bonus). And, there is a case where the suggestion effect ends by shifting from the advantageous section to the normal section (for example, when shifting to the normal section after the bonus ends and the advantageous section LED19 turns off).
Even when the suggestion effect ends by shifting from the advantageous section to the normal section when the special state ends, the push order of winning within a predetermined period (for example, with a probability of 1 / 1.5). Until you win the role, or within 10 games), you will move from the normal section to the advantageous section,
The result image is a predetermined period (for example, as shown in FIGS. 17, 18, and 20) after a related image different from the result image (for example, the door image 51b shown in FIGS. 17 and 18) is displayed. It is displayed when the period (t4 to t5) when the door closing effect is executed has passed.
The notification of information about the game performed by the notification means based on the winning a prize generated in the game at which the specific state ends ends after a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the display of the result image (for example, shown in FIG. 18 (k)). As shown in FIG. 19 (p), the display of the result image 51d starts, the display of the result image 51d ends by whiteout, and then the display of the number of payouts on the game auxiliary display 12 ends).
The suggestion that the state shifts to the special state includes a selection effect that allows the player to select the effect state in the special state (for example, an effect that causes the player to select the RT effect shown in FIG. 19 (q)).
By the selection effect, the effect state in the special state is determined before the state shifts to the special state (for example, before the RT screen shown in FIG. 19 (t) is displayed, FIG. 19 (r) shows. RT production is confirmed as shown).

As a result, even if the advantageous section ends after the end of the bonus, the advantageous section is controlled again within a predetermined period, so that it is possible to prevent the game from being less enjoyable.

In addition, various configurations, various processes, timings of various processes, and the like in the above-described embodiments and modifications can be appropriately combined.

FIG. 23 is a diagram showing how a specific effect is being executed in the slot machine 1. 23 (A) and 23 (B) are both front views of the slot machine 1. As shown in FIGS. 23 (A) and 23 (B), the slot machine 1 is provided with at least a liquid crystal display 51, a side lamp 27, and speakers 53 and 54. The side lamp 27 is installed in the vicinity thereof so as to surround the screen of the liquid crystal display 51. In FIG. 23, the configurations of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, various switches 6, 7, 8L, 8C, 8R, 10 and the like are omitted. Further, as another example of the gaming machine, when a pachinko gaming machine is adopted instead of the slot machine 1, the operating means (ball striking operation handle) for firing the pachinko ball and the variable display device (liquid crystal) that changes the design are used. A well-known configuration such as (which may also be used as the display 51) is omitted from FIG. 23.

Both FIGS. 23 (A) and 23 (B) show an example of a specific effect executed during the customer waiting state. In particular, FIG. 23 (A) shows a state in which a demonstration image (demo image) is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and FIG. 23 (B) shows a notification image directed to the player on the liquid crystal display 51. Show how it is. The demo image is, for example, a function introduction movie as a video that introduces functions such as how to play and direct the slot machine 1. (A) to (d) are shown as examples of the broadcast image at the end of the line extending from the "notification image" of FIG. 23 (B) in four branches to the right. In this way, during the customer waiting state, the demo image or the broadcast image is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. Hereinafter, the period of waiting for customers is simply referred to as a "demo period".

Of particular note is, as shown in FIG. 23 (A), while the side lamp 27 blinks and the effect sound is output from the speakers 53 and 54 during the period when the demo image is displayed, FIG. 23 (B). ), The side lamp 27 is turned off and the speakers 53 and 54 do not generate sound during the period when the broadcast image is displayed instead of the demo image. As described above, during the demonstration period, the demo image and the broadcast image are displayed as specific effects, and the side lamps 27 and the speakers 53 and 54 perform the effects. However, the mode of the effect by the side lamp 27 and the speakers 53 and 54 is different between the period in which the demo image is displayed and the period in which the broadcast image is displayed. In addition, although an example in which the side lamp 27 and the speaker 53, 54 do not produce the effect in the latter period is described here, in the latter period, the side lamp 27 and the speaker 53, 54 are compared with the former period. The degree of production by the speaker may be modest (such as one that emits light in a specific color without blinking, one that has a low sound, etc.).

[Notification image]
Next, an example of the broadcast image shown in FIGS. 23 (B) (a) to (d) will be described. The broadcast image is an image that broadcasts information for alerting the player to various types of attention.

(A) Image of preventing immersion (Caution image 51e)
The immersive prevention image (warning image 51e) is provided with an image surrounding the character and an image of a plurality of types having different display areas, although the content of the character is the same. With such a immersive prevention display, the player is restrained or warned from being enthusiastic about the game, and the player is restrained or warned from spending a large amount of money on the game.

(B) Fraud prevention image The fraud prevention image is a warning display that prohibits games under the age of 18 saying "Games under the age of 18 are prohibited by law" and "Crime is a crime." It includes three types: a warning display to control fraudulent activities and a warning display to control fraudulent activities such as "Please be careful about fraud disguised as a strategy." These fraud prevention images may be displayed at the same time, or may be displayed at different timings. As other images for preventing fraud, for example, when a movable accessory is provided on the outer frame of the slot machine 1, care should be taken not to be injured by the movement of the movable accessory. It may be adopted.

(C) Forget-to-take prevention image The forgotten-to-take image is a prepaid card or the like as a recording medium for games in which balance information or the like is recorded as information that can identify the magnitude of the value for games such as a game ball that can be used for games. This is an image as a display to prevent forgetting to remove the card. The forget-to-take prevention image includes the text "Please be careful not to forget or steal the prepaid card." And an image showing the ejection of the card. It should be noted that, instead of a card, it is intended to prevent forgetting to take a coin or the like as a recording medium for a game in which balance information or the like is recorded as information that can specify the magnitude of the value for the game that can be used for the game. Images may be adopted.

(D) Manufacturer logo image The manufacturer logo image is an image of the manufacturer logo display (also referred to as manufacturer information) indicating the manufacturer of the slot machine 1. The maker logo image is displayed, for example, in the company color of the maker. During the period when the maker logo image is displayed, the side lamp 27 also emits light in the corporate color. In this way, by causing the LED to emit light in a light emitting mode related to the displayed content, the impression of the displayed content can be further deepened.

Although all of the broadcast images described above are still images, some or all of them may be composed of moving images.

[Execution timing of specific effect]
FIG. 24 is a timing chart of an execution example of the specific effect. FIG. 24A shows an example of a specific effect executed during the demonstration period. Further, FIG. 24B shows an example of a specific effect executed in the jackpot game state. Further, in each of FIGS. 24 (A) and 24 (B), t on the horizontal axis indicates the timing at which the event occurred, and the vertical axis indicates a display example of the liquid crystal display 51, the presence / absence of light emission of the side lamp 27, and The light emission pattern, the presence / absence of output of the speakers 53 and 54, and the output pattern are shown.

[Specific production performed during the demo period]
FIG. 24A will be used to describe the specific effect performed during the demonstration period. In FIG. 24 (A), the demonstration period is t11 to t15. The condition for starting the demonstration period is that no game is being played by the player. Specifically, the state in which the game is not performed continues until a predetermined time (15 seconds in the present embodiment) elapses after the result of the variable display is other than the specific symbol. The end condition of the demonstration period is the start of the game by the player based on the operation by the operating means. Whether or not the game has started depends on whether or not a slot machine has performed, for example, an operation for setting the number of bets (BET operation. In addition, automatic BET by inserting medals or winning replays) Each can be determined by determination, and in the case of a pachinko gaming machine, for example, by determining whether or not a prize has been detected in the starting winning opening. In the case of a pachinko gaming machine, the demonstration period may be terminated on condition that the operation of the hitting ball operation handle is detected.

Prior to t11, the game is executed based on the operation by the operating means. At this time, for example, a fluctuating symbol or the like is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 (not shown). Further, the side lamp 27 emits light in a normal light emitting pattern (for example, blinking in a specific color). Further, the speakers 53 and 54 output a normal production sound (for example, BGM output during fluctuation).

At t11, the start condition of the specific effect is satisfied. Then, the demo screen is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. Further, the side lamp 27 emits light in a light emitting pattern during the demonstration (for example, blinking in a specific color different from the normal light emitting pattern). Further, the speakers 53 and 54 output the effect sound during the demonstration (for example, BGM different from BGM output during fluctuation).

At t12, 39 seconds after the demo screen is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, an image such as fraud prevention is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. Further, while the image such as fraud prevention is displayed, the side lamp 27 continues to be turned off. Further, the speakers 53 and 54 continue to be in a state where no sound is output.

At t13, 6 seconds after the fraud prevention image is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, the immersive prevention image is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. Further, while the immersive prevention image is displayed, the side lamp 27 continues to be turned off as in the case where the fraud prevention image is displayed. Further, the speakers 53 and 54 continue to be in a state where no sound is output.

At t14, 6 seconds after the immersive prevention image is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, the demo screen is displayed again on the liquid crystal display 51. The light emitting mode of the side lamp 27 and the sound output mode of the speakers 53 and 54 while the demo screen is displayed are the same as those during the demo screen display at t11 to t12.

In this way, during the period during which the fraud prevention image and the immersive prevention image are not displayed, the customer waiting demo effect sound is output from the speakers 53 and 54, while the fraud prevention image and the immersive prevention image are output. No sound is output from the speakers 53 and 54 during the displayed period.

Here, at t15, when the game is started by the player, the end condition of the customer waiting demo production is satisfied, and the customer waiting demo production ends. Then, the effect modes of the liquid crystal display 51, the side lamps 27, and the speakers 53 and 54 after t15 correspond to those during the game as those before t11.

FIG. 24A describes a case where the start of the game by the player is detected at t15, but if the state in which the start of the game by the player is not detected from t14 continues for 39 seconds, The demo image switches to the fraud prevention image. After that, unless the game is started, the image is switched to the immersive prevention image after the lapse of the same period as the period length of t12 to t13, and the image becomes the demo image after the lapse of the same period as the period length of t13 to t14. Repeat switching. The effect mode of the side lamps 27 and the speakers 53 and 54 during the switching period of these images is a mode corresponding to the switched images as shown in FIG. 24 (A).

[Specific production performed during the jackpot game production period]
FIG. 24B will be used to describe the specific effect executed during the jackpot game effect period. In FIG. 24 (B), the jackpot game production period is t11 to t15. The condition for starting the jackpot game production period is that the result of the variable display is a specific symbol. The end condition of the jackpot game production period is the end of the jackpot game state. However, if the game machine is such that the next variable display can be started after a predetermined variable pause period from the end of the jackpot game state, the variable pause period elapses after the end of the jackpot game state. Continue until. That is, the end condition of the jackpot game production period in this case is the elapse of the variable suspension period.

FIG. 24B describes a case in which the jackpot game production period ends after the variable pause period. That is, at t11, the result of the variable display becomes a specific symbol, and the jackpot game production period starts. After that, the jackpot game state ends at t13 and shifts to the variable pause period, the variable pause period ends at t15, and the jackpot game production period started from t11 ends. In the variable suspension period, as shown in FIG. 24 (B), the jackpot end screen is displayed first, and then the screen is switched to the maker logo display screen at the timing of t14.

Before t11 in FIG. 24 (B), the variable display of the symbol is executed. At this time, for example, a fluctuating symbol or the like is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 (not shown). Further, the side lamp 27 emits light in a normal light emitting pattern (for example, blinking in a specific color). Further, the speakers 53 and 54 output a normal production sound (for example, BGM output during fluctuation).

At t11, the liquid crystal display 51 displays a jackpot start screen notifying that the jackpot has started. Further, at the bottom of the jackpot start screen, an image for preventing forgetting to take and an image for preventing digging are also displayed. The display start timing of the jackpot start screen and the display start timing of the forget-taking prevention image and the immersive prevention image may be the same, and the latter may be displayed later than the former. In any case, the side lamp 27 continues to be turned off while the image for preventing forgetting to take and the image for preventing digging are displayed. Further, the speakers 53 and 54 continue to be in a state where no sound is output.

At t12, 10 seconds after the display of the big hit start screen, the game shifts to the big hit game state. At this time, the liquid crystal display 51 displays a screen during the jackpot game indicating that the jackpot game has been started. Further, the side lamp 27 emits light in a light emission pattern during a big hit. In the present embodiment, as the jackpot emission pattern, the emission color is changed in the order of yellow, green, and red, and this is repeated. Further, the speakers 53 and 54 output a sound produced during a big hit (for example, a musical piece).

At t13 when the jackpot game state ends, the liquid crystal display 51 displays a jackpot end screen indicating that the jackpot game has ended. Further, below the jackpot end screen, an image for preventing forgetting to take and an image for preventing entanglement are displayed as in the case of displaying the jackpot start screen. The display start timing of the jackpot end screen may be the same as the display start timing of the forgotten image and the immersive prevention image, or the latter may be displayed later than the former. In any case, the side lamp 27 continues to be turned off while the image for preventing forgetting to take and the image for preventing digging are displayed. Further, the speakers 53 and 54 continue to be in a state where no sound is output.

From t13, when the jackpot game state ends, a variable pause period in which the variable display of the symbol is not executed is entered. During this time, if it is a slot machine, even if the start button is pressed, the reel will not start rotating. Further, in the case of a pachinko gaming machine, even if there is a hold memory required for variable display of the symbol, the symbol is not variablely displayed. The variable suspension period continues from t13 to t15. During the variable suspension period, at t14, 10 seconds after the display of the jackpot end screen, the maker logo image is displayed in the center of the screen of the liquid crystal display 51. After that, the maker logo image is displayed until t15 when the variable suspension period ends. The maker logo image is displayed in the company color (blue in this embodiment). In addition, a dent prevention image is displayed below the maker logo image. Further, while the maker logo image is displayed, the side lamp 27 lights up in the same blue color as the company color and continues in that state. Further, the speakers 53 and 54 continue to be in a state where no sound is output.

In this way, during the period from t12 to t13 when the jackpot game screen is displayed, the side lamp 27 changes its emission color depending on yellow, green, and red, whereas the maker logo image is displayed. During the period from t14 to t15, the side lamp 27 emits light in blue, and the latter emits light in a constant light emitting mode that is less noticeable than the former.

Further, during the period from t14 to t15 in which the maker logo image is displayed, the side lamp 27 emits light in blue, which is the corporate color. On the other hand, during the period from t12 to t13 when the jackpot game screen is displayed, the emission color of the side lamp 27 changes depending on yellow, green, and red. That is, in the latter, the side lamp 27 emits light using yellow, green, and red, which are different from the corporate colors.

At t15, which is 2 seconds after the display of the maker logo image and the entanglement prevention image, the fluctuation pause period ends, and the display of these notification images ends at that timing. When the display of the notification image ends, the specific effect during the jackpot game effect period ends.

The display of the liquid crystal display 51 after t15, the light emitting mode of the side lamp 27, and the sound output mode of the speakers 53 and 54 are the same as those before t11, and when a new variable display is started, the corresponding effect is produced. Performed by each.

Here, the demo period of FIG. 24 (A) and the jackpot game production period of FIG. 24 (B) are compared from the viewpoint of production. First, comparing the timing of displaying the immersive prevention image, in the demonstration period, as shown in t13 of FIG. 24 (A), 39 seconds have passed since the demonstration period started, and after the fraud prevention image is further displayed. While it is displayed after 6 seconds, in the jackpot game production period, as shown in t11 or t13 of FIG. 24 (B), the display timing of the jackpot start screen or the display timing of the jackpot end screen (that is, the screen during the game). Is displayed at the timing when the display of is finished).

Further, the entanglement prevention image displayed at t13 to t14 in FIG. 24 (A) is displayed in the center of the screen of the liquid crystal display 51, whereas the entanglement prevention image displayed at t13 to t14 in FIG. 24 (B) is displayed. The image is displayed at the lower part of the screen of the liquid crystal display 51 together with the big hit end image and the forget-to-take prevention image, and the display modes are different between the two. On the other hand, the side lamp 27 remains off at t13 to t14 in FIG. 24 (A), and the side lamp 27 remains off at t13 to t14 in FIG. 24 (B). Is.

It should be noted that even if the display mode of the entanglement prevention image displayed at t13 to t14 of FIG. 24 (B) is made smaller than that of the immersion prevention image displayed at t13 to t14 of FIG. 24 (A), the display mode may be different. Alternatively, the display mode may be different by changing the display color.

[Main effect]
Next, the main effects obtained by the above-described configuration will be described.
In the present embodiment, as shown by t11 to t12 and t14 to t15 in FIG. 24A, the side lamp 27 is used in the demonstration period during which the fraud prevention image and the immersive prevention image are not displayed. While the light emitting mode changes by blinking, as shown in t12 to t14, the side lamp 27 remains off during the period when the fraud prevention image and the immersive prevention image are displayed, and the light emitting mode is changed. It does not change. In this way, without being confused by the light emitting mode of the side lamp 27, it is possible to transmit information for alerting the player to prevent fraud and prevent entanglement.

As shown in FIG. 23A, by locating the side lamp 27 in the vicinity of the liquid crystal display 51, the effect of the side lamp 27 and the effect of the liquid crystal display 51 can be synergistic to diversify the effect. Can be done.

As shown in t12 to t13 of FIG. 24B, while the emission color of the side lamp 27 changes in yellow, green, and red during the period in which the notification image is displayed during the jackpot game production period. , As shown in t11 to t12 of FIG. 24 (B), the side lamp 27 was turned off during the period during which the notification image (image for preventing forgetting to take and image for preventing immersion) was displayed during the jackpot game production period. There is up to. In this way, it is possible to transmit information for alerting the player to prevent fraud and prevent immersiveness while enhancing the effect of the effect with various colors.

As shown in t11 to t12 and t14 to t15 of FIG. 24 (A), during the period during which the fraud prevention image and the immersive prevention image are not displayed during the demonstration period, the customer waiting demonstration sound is produced from the speakers 53 and 54. On the other hand, as shown in t12 to t14 of FIG. 24A, no sound is output from the speakers 53 and 54 during the period when the fraud prevention image and the immersive prevention image are displayed. In this way, without being confused by the sound output from the speakers 53 and 54, information for alerting the player to prevent fraud and prevent entanglement can be transmitted.

Since the immersive prevention image, fraud prevention image, forgetting prevention image, and maker logo image shown in FIGS. 23 (B) (a) to 23 (d) are still images, they are not confused by the movement on the display. , Information for calling attention to prevention of entanglement, fraud prevention, etc., and prevention of forgetting to take, and information for impressing the maker image can be suitably transmitted to the player.

The immersive prevention image displayed at t13 to t14 in FIG. 24 (A) is displayed in the center of the screen of the liquid crystal display 51, whereas the immersive prevention image displayed at t13 to t14 in FIG. 24 (B) is a liquid crystal display. A jackpot end image and a forget-to-take prevention image are displayed at the bottom of the screen of the display 51, and the display modes are different between the two. Further, the side lamp 27 remains off at t13 to t14 of FIG. 24 (A), and the side lamp 27 remains off at t13 to t14 of FIG. 24 (B), and the light emitting modes are the same for both. .. In this way, while making it possible to notify the information for alerting the player to prevent fraud and prevent entanglement in a manner according to the situation, the information for alerting the player to prevent fraud and prevent entanglement. Can be transmitted.

In the period of the big hit game production period of FIG. 24 (B) in which the screen during the big hit game of t12 to t13 is displayed, the emission color of the side lamp 27 changes depending on yellow, green, and red. During the period when the maker logo images of t14 to t15 are displayed, the side lamp 27 emits light in blue, and the latter emits light in a constant light emitting mode that is less noticeable than the former. In this way, since the light emission of the side lamp 27 does not excessively produce an effect, it is possible to draw more attention to the maker logo to the player.

During the period from t12 to t13 during the jackpot game production period shown in FIG. 24B, the side lamp 27 changes its emission color in yellow, green, and red. During the period when the manufacturer logo images of t14 to t15 are displayed, the side lamp 27 emits light in blue, which is a corporate color of a manufacturer different from yellow, green, and red. In this way, the side lamp 27 emits light in a light emitting mode peculiar to the period during which the maker logo image is displayed, so that the player can have a stronger impression of the maker.

[About specific production]
In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 24A, an example in which BGM is output from the speakers 53 and 54 when the demo screen is displayed has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. , Music or dialogue may be output. Further, the sound is not always output, and may be output during a part of the period.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 24, blinking and color change are exemplified as the light emitting mode of the side lamp 27 when the notification image is not displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and each LED. The emission color may be different or the brightness may be high. Further, as a light emitting mode of the side lamp 27 when the broadcast image is displayed, lighting and extinguishing by a single color are exemplified. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and any light emission mode that is less noticeable than when the broadcast image is not displayed may be used. For example, the emission color may be different for each LED as in the case where the broadcast image is not displayed, but the brightness may be lowered.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 23 (B) and 23 (d), the maker logo is displayed as a notification image, but the present invention is not limited to this and appears in the production of the slot machine 1. The character image may be displayed. In this case, during the period when the character image is displayed, the side lamp 27 is made to emit light in the image color of the character.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 24, the notification image is displayed immediately 39 seconds after the display of the demo screen. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the notification image may be gradually displayed by fading in without displaying the notification image immediately. For example, the image is displayed by gradually darkening the color from a light color. Further, when the display of the notification image is finished, the notification image may be faded out to gradually erase the notification image.

In the present embodiment, at t11 in FIG. 24B, the liquid crystal display 51 displays a jackpot start screen notifying that the jackpot has started, and also an image for preventing forgetting to take and an image for preventing immersiveness. Is displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and while the jackpot start screen is displayed, another notification image may be displayed, or either an forget-to-take prevention image or a immersive prevention image may be displayed. Alternatively, the broadcast image may not be displayed. Alternatively, the side lamp 27 may be turned on in a single color to continue it.

Further, at t14 in FIG. 24 (B), the maker logo image and the entanglement prevention image are displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and other broadcast images may be displayed, a plurality of broadcast images may be displayed at the same time, or they may be displayed separately. When the broadcast images are displayed separately, the broadcast images may be switched and displayed every two seconds.

[About warning display]
Next, the warning display will be described in detail. FIG. 25 is a timing chart of the basic pattern of the alert display. The basic pattern of the warning display performed at the end of the bonus will be described with reference to FIG. 25.

Prior to t21, the result notification during freezing was performed, and at t21, the sub-control unit 91 displayed the final result on the result image 51d and displayed a warning, that is, a caution regarding the game to the player. The warning image 51e is displayed. Further, at t22 when a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed since the warning display was started, the sub-control unit 91 ends the warning display. At this time, since the timer for freeze control also time-ups, the main control unit 41 ends the freeze control, and the sub control unit 91 selects the RT effect after switching from the result notification to the whiteout based on the freeze command. Display the screen (see FIGS. 18 (о), 19 (p), 19 (q)).

FIG. 26 (A) is a timing chart of the first embodiment of the warning display when an error occurs, and FIG. 26 (B) is a timing chart of the second embodiment of the warning display when an error occurs. Next, with reference to FIG. 26A, a first embodiment of the control pattern when an error occurs during the warning display at the end of the bonus will be described.

In the first embodiment shown in FIG. 26A, at t21, the sub-control unit 91 starts a warning display. The alert display has priority over the result notification. For example, the alert image 51e is displayed in front of the result image 51d. Further, if an error occurs at t23 after the warning display and before the elapse of the predetermined period, the sub control unit 91 displays an error based on the command received from the main control unit 41. The error display is displayed with priority over the result notification and the alert display. For example, an error screen described later is displayed in front of the result image 51d and the alert image 51e, and the result image 51d and the alert image 51e become invisible. .. Here, the error screen is, for example, as shown in FIG. 27 (B) described later, a character image of "-ERROR-" and "(code ○ △ □) Please call the hall staff." This is a screen for displaying a character image. At this time, the main control unit 41 continues the freeze control even after the error occurs, while stopping the time counting of the freeze control timer.

Further, when the error is resolved at t24 after the error occurs, the sub control unit 91 ends the error display based on the command received from the main control unit 41, and the result image 51d and the caution image 51e can be visually recognized again. Become. At this time, the sub-control unit 91 has t25 after t22 so that the total period of the first visible period before the error occurs and the second visible period after the error occurs is a predetermined period. Continue to display the alert until. At this time, since the main control unit 41 restarts the time counting of the timer for freeze control, the timer time-ups and ends the freeze control at t25, and the sub control unit 91 starts from the result notification based on the freeze command. After switching to whiteout, the RT effect selection screen is displayed.

FIG. 27 is a diagram showing an effect example of the first embodiment of the warning display when an error occurs.
As a result, in the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 27 (A), if an error occurs during the alert display in the result notification during the freeze, an error occurs as shown in FIG. 27 (B). The display is prioritized and the result notification and warning display become invisible. At this time, an error sound is output together with an error display, and the side lamp 27 is turned off. Further, when the error is resolved, as shown in FIG. 27 (C), the error display ends and the result notification and the alert display become visible again, and when the second visible period elapses from the error resolution, FIG. 27 ( After the freeze is completed with the whiteout as a boundary as shown in D), the RT effect selection screen is displayed as shown in FIG. 28 (E).

Next, with reference to FIG. 26B, a second embodiment of the control pattern when an error occurs during the warning display at the end of the bonus will be described.

In the second embodiment shown in FIG. 26B, similarly to the first embodiment, when some error occurs in t23 after the sub-control unit 91 starts the warning display at t21, the sub-control unit 91 causes the sub-control unit 91. While displaying an error, outputting an alarm sound, and turning off the side lamp 27, the main control unit 41 continues the freeze control even during the error display, while stopping the time counting of the timer for the freeze control. When the error is resolved at t24, the sub-control unit 91 ends the error display, and the result image 51d and the caution image 51e can be visually recognized again. At this time, in the second embodiment, the sub-control unit 91 continues the warning display until t26 after t22 so that the second visible period after the error occurs becomes a predetermined period. On the other hand, since the main control unit 41 restarts the time counting of the timer for freeze control as in the first embodiment, at t25, the timer times out and the freeze control ends, and the sub control unit 91 notifies the result. After switching from to whiteout, the RT effect selection screen is displayed.

FIG. 28 is a diagram showing an effect example of the second embodiment of the warning display when an error occurs.
As a result, in the second embodiment, if an error occurs during the alert display in the result notification during the freeze, as shown in FIG. 28 (A), an error occurs as shown in FIG. 28 (B). The display is prioritized and the result notification and warning display become invisible. When the error is resolved, as shown in FIG. 28C, the error display ends and the result notification and the warning display become visible again. In addition, since the warning display continues for a predetermined period from the end of the error display, RT is displayed when the whiteout is switched to or after the freeze is completed, as shown in FIGS. 28 (D) and 28 (E). The alert display is also performed when the effect selection screen is displayed, and after the predetermined period (second visible period) has elapsed, the alert display ends as shown in FIG. 28 (F). Only the RT effect selection screen is displayed.

FIG. 29A is a timing chart of the first embodiment of the warning display when a power failure occurs, and FIG. 29B is a timing chart of the second embodiment of the warning display when a power failure occurs. Next, with reference to FIG. 29A, a first embodiment of the control pattern when a power failure occurs during the warning display at the end of the bonus will be described.

In the first embodiment shown in FIG. 29 (A), when a power failure occurs at t23 after the sub-control unit 91 starts the warning display at t21, the sub-control unit 91 displays a result notification or a warning display. It is interrupted, and the result image 51d and the alert image 51e become invisible. At this time, the main control unit 41 interrupts the timekeeping of the freeze control and the freeze control timer.

Further, when the power failure is restored at t24, the sub-control unit 91 resumes the result notification and the warning display, and the result image 51d and the warning image 51e can be visually recognized again. At this time, the sub-control unit 91 is after t22 so that the total period of the first visible period before the power failure and the second visible period after the power failure occurs is a predetermined period. The warning display is continued until t25 of. At this time, since the main control unit 41 restarts the time counting of the timer for freeze control, the timer time-ups and ends the freeze control at t25, and the sub control unit 91 starts from the result notification based on the freeze command. After switching to whiteout, the RT effect selection screen is displayed.

FIG. 30 is a diagram showing an effect example of the first embodiment of the warning display when a power failure occurs.
As a result, in the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 30 (A), when a power failure occurs while the alert is displayed in the result notification during the freeze, as shown in FIG. 30 (B). The liquid crystal display 51 hides the screen. Further, when the power failure is restored, as shown in FIG. 30 (C), the result notification and the warning display are resumed and the visibility is made visible again, and when the second visible period elapses, as shown in FIG. 30 (D). After the freeze is completed with the whiteout as the boundary, the RT effect selection screen is displayed as shown in FIG. 30 (E).

Next, a second embodiment of the control pattern when a power failure occurs during the warning display at the end of the bonus will be described with reference to FIG. 29 (B).

In the second embodiment shown in FIG. 29B, similarly to the first embodiment, when a power failure occurs in t23 after the sub-control unit 91 starts the warning display at t21, the sub-control unit 91 The result notification and the warning display are interrupted, and the main control unit 41 interrupts the time measurement of the freeze control and the freeze control timer. Further, when the power failure is restored at t24, the sub-control unit 91 resumes the result notification and the warning display, and the result image 51d and the warning image 51e can be visually recognized again. At this time, in the second embodiment, the sub-control unit 91 continues the warning display until t26 after t22 so that the second visible period after the power failure occurs is a predetermined period. On the other hand, since the main control unit 41 restarts the time counting of the timer for freeze control as in the first embodiment, at t25, the timer times out and the freeze control ends, and the sub control unit 91 notifies the result. After switching from to whiteout, the RT effect selection screen is displayed.

FIG. 31 is a diagram showing an effect example of the second embodiment of the warning display when a power failure occurs.
As a result, in the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 31 (A), when a power failure occurs during the alert display in the result notification during the freeze, as shown in FIG. 31 (B), The liquid crystal display 51 hides the screen. Further, when the power failure is resolved, as shown in FIG. 31 (C), the result notification and the warning display are resumed and the visual recognition is possible again. In addition, since the warning display continues for a predetermined period after the power failure is restored, as shown in FIGS. 31 (D) and 31 (E), when the whiteout is switched to or the freeze ends. The alert display is also performed when the RT effect selection screen is displayed after the operation is performed, and after the predetermined period (second visible period) has elapsed, the alert display is displayed as shown in FIG. 31 (F). Is finished and only the RT effect selection screen is displayed.

FIG. 32 (A) is a timing chart of the third embodiment of the warning display when an error occurs, and FIG. 32 (B) is a timing chart of the third embodiment of the warning display when a power failure occurs. Next, a third embodiment of the control pattern when an error occurs during the warning display at the end of the bonus will be described with reference to FIG. 32 (A).

In the third embodiment shown in FIG. 32 (A), similarly to the basic pattern, the sub-control unit 91 starts the warning display at t21 and then ends the warning display at t22 after a predetermined period has elapsed. Further, at this time, since the timer for freeze control also time-ups, the main control unit 41 ends the freeze control, and the sub control unit 91 switches from the result notification to the whiteout based on the freeze command, and then RT effect. Display the selection screen of.

Here, in the third embodiment, when some error occurs at t27 after the lapse of a predetermined period, the sub control unit 91 displays an error based on the command received from the main control unit 41. The error display is displayed with priority over the RT effect selection screen. For example, an error screen described later is displayed in front of the RT effect selection screen, and the RT effect selection screen becomes invisible. Further, when the error is resolved at t28 after the error occurs, the sub control unit 91 ends the error display based on the command received from the main control unit 41, and the RT effect selection screen becomes visible again. At this time, the sub-control unit 91 restarts the warning display and ends the warning display at t29 when the predetermined period has elapsed.

FIG. 33 is a diagram showing an effect example of the third embodiment of the warning display when an error occurs.
As a result, in the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 33 (A), when a predetermined period elapses after the warning display is performed in the result notification during the freeze, whiteout is performed as shown in FIG. 33 (B). After the freeze is completed, the RT effect selection screen is displayed as shown in FIG. 33 (C). Further, if an error occurs during the display of the RT effect selection screen, the error display is preferentially displayed and the RT effect selection screen becomes invisible as shown in FIG. 33 (D). At this time, an error sound is output together with an error display, and the side lamp 27 is turned off. Further, when the error is resolved, as shown in FIG. 33 (E), the error display ends and the RT effect selection screen becomes visible again, while the warning display is performed again. Then, when the predetermined period elapses, as shown in FIG. 33 (F), the alert display ends and only the RT effect selection screen is displayed.

Next, a third embodiment of the control pattern when a power failure occurs during the warning display at the end of the bonus will be described with reference to FIG. 32 (B).

In the third embodiment shown in FIG. 32 (B), similarly to the basic pattern, the sub-control unit 91 starts the warning display at t21 and then ends the warning display at t22 after a predetermined period has elapsed. Further, at this time, since the timer for freeze control also time-ups, the main control unit 41 ends the freeze control, and the sub control unit 91 switches from the result notification to the whiteout based on the freeze command, and then RT effect. Display the selection screen of.

Here, in the third embodiment, if a power failure occurs at t27 after a predetermined period has elapsed, the sub-control unit 91 interrupts the display of the RT effect selection screen. Further, when the power failure is restored at t28 after the power failure occurs, the sub-control unit 91 resumes the display of the RT effect selection screen and becomes visible again. At this time, the sub-control unit 91 restarts the warning display and ends the warning display at t29 when the predetermined period has elapsed.

FIG. 34 is a diagram showing an effect example of the third embodiment of the warning display when a power failure occurs.
As a result, in the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 34 (A), when a predetermined period elapses after the warning is displayed in the result notification during the freeze, a whiteout is performed as shown in FIG. After the freeze is completed, the RT effect selection screen is displayed as shown in FIG. 34 (C). Further, if a power failure occurs during the display of the RT effect selection screen, the liquid crystal display 51 hides the screen as shown in FIG. 34 (D). Further, when the power failure is restored, as shown in FIG. 34 (E), the display of the RT effect selection screen is resumed and the display becomes visible again, while the warning display is performed again. Then, when the predetermined period elapses, as shown in FIG. 34 (F), the warning display ends and only the RT effect selection screen is displayed.
In the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 34 (E), the display of the RT effect selection screen is resumed when the power failure is restored after the power failure occurs during the display of the RT effect selection screen. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the RT effect may be executed without restarting the display of the RT effect selection screen when the power failure is restored. For example, if the basic stage is stage A, stage A may be automatically selected when the power failure is restored, and the RT effect of stage A may be executed. In this case, even if stage B or stage C other than stage A is temporarily selected on the RT effect selection screen before the power failure occurs, stage A is automatically selected and the stage is staged when the power failure is restored. The RT effect of A may be executed.

As described above, according to the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the sub-control unit 91 can display a warning in the result notification during the freeze at the end of the bonus, and when an error occurs, it is possible to display a warning. It is possible to display an error indicating that it is an error state as a special state. Further, the sub-control unit 91 prioritizes the error display over the alert display when displaying the error, and when the error display is prioritized over the alert display, the error is canceled and the error display is displayed. When it is finished, the warning display is displayed again so that the player can see it.
By doing so, when the error display is prioritized over the warning display, the slot machine that does not display the warning display again so that the player can see it when the error is cleared. Can also preferably call attention to the player.

Further, according to the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in the second embodiment shown in FIGS. 26 (B) and 28, the sub-control unit 91 gives priority to the error display over the warning display. When the error is cleared and the error display is finished, the warning display is performed again from the beginning for a predetermined period.
By doing so, it is possible to make the player visually recognize the warning display for a period of a predetermined period or longer.

Further, according to the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in the first embodiment shown in FIGS. 26 (A) and 27, the sub-control unit 91 gives priority to the error display over the warning display. When the error is cleared and the error display ends, the warning display is performed again so that the total period of the first visible period and the second visible period becomes a predetermined period.
By doing so, the player can visually recognize the specific display for a period of a predetermined period or longer.

Further, according to the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in the third embodiment shown in FIGS. 32 (A) and 33, the sub-control unit 91 is terminated after the warning display is performed for a predetermined period. Later, when the error is cleared after the error occurs and the error display ends, the warning display is performed again for a predetermined period so that the player can see it.
By doing so, even if the warning display is performed for a predetermined period before the error occurs, the warning display is performed for a predetermined period even after the error occurs, so that the period longer than the predetermined period. It is possible to make the player visually recognize the warning display.

Further, according to the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the sub-control unit 91 is an example when the interruption condition is satisfied when the warning display is performed in the result notification during the freeze at the end of the bonus. When a power failure occurs, the result notification and the warning display are interrupted, making it invisible to the player. Further, the sub-control unit 91 re-displays a warning for a predetermined period so that the player can see it when the power failure is restored, as an example when the interruption release condition is satisfied.
By doing so, it is possible to urge the player to be more preferably alert than a game machine in which the alert display is not performed again for a predetermined period in a display mode that the player can visually recognize when the power failure is restored. it can.

Further, according to the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in the second embodiment shown in FIGS. 29 (B) and 31 of FIG. In some cases, when the power failure is restored, the warning display is displayed again from the beginning for a predetermined period.
By doing so, it is possible to make the player visually recognize the warning display for a period of a predetermined period or longer.

Further, according to the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in the first embodiment shown in FIGS. 29A and 30A, the sub-control unit 91 is interrupted by a power failure and the warning display is interrupted. In this case, when the power failure is restored, the warning display is performed again so that the total period of the first visible period and the second visible period becomes a predetermined period.
By doing so, the player can visually recognize the specific display for a period of a predetermined period or longer.

Further, according to the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in the third embodiment shown in FIGS. 32 (B) and 34, the sub-control unit 91 ends with the warning display being performed over a predetermined period. When the power failure is restored after the power failure occurs later, the warning display is performed again for a predetermined period so that the player can see it.
By doing so, even if the specific display is performed for a predetermined period before the abnormality occurs, the specific display is performed for a predetermined period even after the abnormality occurs, so that the specific display is performed for a predetermined period or longer. The specific display can be reliably visually recognized by the player.

Further, according to the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the sub-control unit 91 displays a warning image 51e as a warning display as shown in FIGS. 23 (B), 27, 28, and the like. The side lamp 27 is lit or blinked in a light emitting mode for result notification for a predetermined period, and the light emitting mode of the side lamp 27 is not changed at least during the display of the caution image 51e.
By doing so, it is possible to appropriately transmit information regarding alerting such as prevention of entanglement to the player without being confused by the light emitting mode of the side lamp 27.

In the present embodiment, the case where the period from the occurrence of an unforeseen situation such as an error or power failure to the resolution is shorter than the predetermined period is illustrated, but the case is resolved after the unforeseen situation occurs. The period up to is may be a predetermined period or longer. Even in this case, according to the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, it is possible to achieve the above-mentioned effects.

In the present embodiment, the display of a sinking prevention image (warning image 51e, suppression display) is illustrated as an example of a warning display that calls attention to the game to the player, but the present invention is not limited to this, for example. , The image for preventing fraud or the image for preventing forgetting to take may be displayed as shown in FIG. 23 (B). Further, the specific display may include a warning display such as a warning image 51e, an image for preventing fraud, and an image for preventing forgetting to take, and in addition to the warning display, the maker logo image shown in FIG. 23 (B) and the like. May also be included.

In the present embodiment, the display position of the warning display is the same regardless of whether the result notification is being performed, the whiteout is being performed, or the RT effect selection screen is being displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display position may differ depending on whether the result notification is being performed, the whiteout is being performed, or the RT effect selection screen is being displayed. By doing so, it is possible to display the alert display at a position that does not interfere with the visibility of the result notification, whiteout, and RT effect selection screens during the alert display, and the result notification, whiteout, and RT effect can be displayed. The selection screen can be preferably displayed.

In the present embodiment, the attention alert image 51e, which is a still image, is displayed as the alert display, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the attention alert image of the moving image may be reproduced (displayed). In this case, in the second embodiment, it is necessary to reproduce the attention-calling image of the moving image from the beginning.
In the second embodiment, the warning display is performed again from the beginning for a predetermined period, but the period for which the warning display is performed again from the beginning may be longer than the predetermined period. Further, as in the second embodiment, it is preferable that the warning display is performed again for a predetermined period or longer, but the period for re-displaying the warning display may be shorter than the predetermined period.
It is preferable to perform the warning display again from the beginning as in the second embodiment. However, for example, when the warning image of the moving image is reproduced as described above, the warning image of the moving image is reproduced at the time of restarting. May be played from the middle.

When reproducing the attention alert image of the moving image as the alert display, in the first embodiment, the attention alert image of the moving image may be reproduced from the time when it becomes invisible (it may be reproduced from the middle). , You may play from the beginning.
In the first embodiment, the sub-control unit 91 re-displays the warning so that the total period of the first visible period and the second visible period becomes a predetermined period, but the warning display is displayed. The total period to be performed may be longer than the predetermined period. Further, as in the first embodiment, it is preferable to display a warning so that the total period of the first visible period and the second visible period is equal to or longer than a predetermined period, but over the second visible period. The total period for displaying the alert may be shorter than the predetermined period, as long as the alert is displayed again.

As in the second embodiment, it is preferable to display the warning display even during the whiteout so that the player can visually recognize the warning display for a predetermined period or longer. During the process, the alert display may be interrupted, or the whiteout may be prioritized over the alert display so that the alert display becomes invisible. In this case, by displaying the alert display including the period during which the alert display becomes invisible during whiteout on the subsequent display of the RT effect selection screen, the period during which the player can visually recognize the alert display. May be longer than a predetermined period.

In the second embodiment, even if the sub control unit 91 controls so that the second visible period in which the alert display is performed again is a predetermined period, the main control unit 41 does not change the freeze period and the alert display is displayed. Although the freeze control is terminated before the termination of the above, the main control unit 41 may extend the freeze period. For example, the freeze control may be terminated when the alert display is terminated. In this case, as in the first embodiment, the sub-control unit 91 can end the warning display and shift to the display of the whiteout and RT effect selection screens when the freeze control ends. Become.

In the third embodiment, the player visually recognizes when an unexpected situation such as an error or a power failure occurs after the warning display is performed for a predetermined period and the unexpected situation is resolved. Although the warning display is performed again over a predetermined period so as to be possible, the period during which the warning display is performed again may be longer than the predetermined period. Further, as in the third embodiment, it is preferable that the warning display is performed again for a predetermined period or longer, but the period for re-displaying the warning display may be shorter than the predetermined period.
It should be noted that, as in the third embodiment, the player can visually recognize the warning display when the unexpected situation is resolved after the unexpected situation occurs after the warning display is performed for a predetermined period and ends. It is preferable to display the alert again, but it is not necessary to display the alert again.

In the present embodiment, the sub-control unit 91 lights or blinks the side lamp 27 in a light emitting mode for result notification for a predetermined period in which the warning image 51e is displayed as the warning display. However, the light emitting means for emitting light during the display of the alert image 51e is not limited to the side lamp 27, for example, the reel backlights 28L, 28C, 28R, and other accessory lamps controlled by the sub control unit 91. There may be. Further, for example, various LEDs 16 to 21, 22L, 22C, 22R controlled by the main control unit 41 may be used, or may be a credit display 11 or a game auxiliary display 12. In this case, it is necessary for the main control unit 41 to control so that the light emitting modes of the various LEDs 16 to 21, 22L, 22C, 22R and the various indicators 11 and 12 do not change during the warning display.
It is preferable not to change the light emitting mode of the side lamp 27 at least during the warning display as in the present embodiment, but the light emitting mode of the side lamp 27 may be changed during the warning display. ..

[Embodiment 2]
In the first embodiment, the alert image 51e is displayed after the bonus lamp 26 is turned off after the end of the bonus, but the present invention is not limited to this, and after the alert image 51e is displayed after the end of the bonus. The bonus lamp 26 may be turned off. Hereinafter, the second embodiment in which the bonus lamp 26 is turned off after the caution image 51e is displayed after the bonus is completed will be described.
In the present embodiment, detailed description of the portion having the same configuration and processing as that of the first embodiment will be omitted, and a portion different from the first embodiment will be mainly described.

In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 36 to 39, 44, and 45, which will be described later, a sub liquid crystal display 71 is newly added to the lower left side of the liquid crystal display 51.

[About the production after the bonus ends]
Next, the production after the bonus ends will be described in detail. FIG. 35 is a timing chart of the basic pattern of the effect after the end of the bonus. The basic pattern of the effect after the end of the bonus will be described with reference to FIG. 35.

Before t31, the final game during the bonus is being played, and the bonus lamp 26 is lit. At t31 when the final game in the bonus is completed, the sub-control unit 91 displays the alert image 51e as the alert display. At t32 after the warning display is started, the sub-control unit 91 starts the result notification and starts updating the display result image 51d. Further, at t33, which is before t34 when the update period of the result image 51d elapses from t32, the sub-control unit 91 finishes updating the displayed result image 51d at t34 after turning off the bonus lamp 26. Further, at t35 after t34, a predetermined period has elapsed since the warning display was started, and the sub-control unit 91 ends the warning display.

At this time, the sub-control unit 91 may add an effect display described later to the result notification, start a setting suggestion display described later, or display a menu screen described later. Therefore, the sub-control unit 91 of the present embodiment enables the operation of the effect switch 56 by the player at t35, and controls to display the menu screen when the operation of the effect switch 56 is accepted. Further, at t36 after t35, the sub-control unit 91 adds an effect display to the result notification, and starts a setting suggestion display at t37 after t36.

(Direction at the time of winning notification when a bell is won in the final game during the bonus)
FIG. 36 is a diagram for explaining an effect at the time of winning notification when a bell is won in the final game during the bonus. As shown in FIG. 36A, the effect image during the bonus is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and the total number of payout images 51a showing the total number of payouts during the bonus is displayed on the upper right of the screen. As shown in FIG. 36 (b), when the player performs the third stop operation, the reel 2R is stopped and the bell symbol is derived, and as shown in FIG. 36 (c), the third stop release is performed. When the press on the stop switch 8R is released, the main control unit 41 executes the winning determination process to generate a bell winning and notify the winning of the bell. With the payout of 8 medals by winning the bell, the end condition of BB is satisfied, the game shifts from the next game to the non-bonus game, and 304 medals are paid out during the bonus by the total payout image 51a. It is shown that it was done. As shown in FIG. 36 (d), after the winning notification is performed, the liquid crystal display 51 starts displaying the caution image 51e, no sound is output from the speakers 53 and 54, and the side lamps. 27 and the reel backlight 28 are turned off. The caution image 51e continues to be displayed in a state of being preferentially displayed (specifically, displayed on the front side) over the effect image and the winning notification image during the bonus.

(Direction when the result is notified during freezing)
37 and 38 are diagrams for explaining the effect at the time of notification of the result during freezing. After the suggestion of winning the bell is completed as shown in FIG. 36 (d), the game end process is executed by the main control unit 41 as shown in FIG. 37 (e). The bet number setting by the MAXBET switch 6 for starting the game becomes invalid for a predetermined delay period. The result notification is performed during the freeze, the result start notification is performed when the result notification starts, the speaker 53 and 54 output a "pilone" sound, and the side lamp 27 and the reel backlight 28 light or blink. After that, as shown in FIG. 37 (f), no sound is output from the speakers 53 and 54, the side lamp 27 and the reel backlight 28 are turned off, and they are shown in FIGS. 37 (g) to 37 (i). As described above, the door closing effect is executed, and the sounds "go ...", "gogogo", and "gashan" are output from the speakers 53 and 54. The caution image 51e continues to be displayed in a state of being preferentially displayed over the effect image and the door image 51b during the bonus.

After the door closing effect is completed, as shown in FIG. 38 (j), a spark display is performed, the spark image 51c is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 on the front side of the door image 51b, and sparks are emitted from the speakers 53 and 54. A beeping sound is output, and the side lamp 27 lights up or blinks in a mode for notifying the result. The caution image 51e continues to be displayed in a state of being preferentially displayed over the spark image 51c.

After the spark display is completed, as shown in FIG. 38 (k), the result notification is started, the result image 51d is displayed, and the sound of "pyeong" is output from the speakers 53 and 54. The bonus lamp 26 starts to turn off and the brightness decreases, while the side lamp 27 keeps lighting or blinking in a mode for result notification. As shown in FIG. 38 (l), first, the first digit is displayed in the result image 51d, and a "pin" sound is output from the speakers 53 and 54. The brightness of the bonus lamp 26 is further reduced, while the side lamp 27 keeps lighting or blinking in a mode for notifying the result. As shown in FIG. 38 (m), next, the second digit is displayed in the result image 51d, and a "pin" sound is output from the speakers 53 and 54. The bonus lamp 26 is completely turned off, while the side lamp 27 keeps lighting or blinking in a result notification mode. As shown in FIG. 38 (n), next, in the result image 51d, the third digit is displayed, and a "pin" sound is output from the speakers 53 and 54. The side lamp 27 keeps lighting or blinking in a mode for notifying the result. As shown in FIGS. 38 (k) to 38 (о), the alert image 51e continues to be displayed until the final result is displayed in the result image 51d.

When a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the display of the alert image 51e, the display of the alert image 51e ends as shown in FIG. 39 (p), and after the display of the alert image 51e ends, it is shown in FIG. 39 (q). As a result, the effect display on the result image 51d is started. In the present embodiment, as an effect display, a plurality of star pattern images are additionally displayed on the result image 51d. The effect display is not limited to the additional display of a plurality of star pattern images, and may be any display as long as the display gives an effect of further emphasizing the result image 51d. For example, an image different from the star pattern image may be additionally displayed in order to make the result image 51d stand out, or a moving image (for example, a moving image in which a meteor moves) for making the result image 51d stand out may be additionally displayed. May be good. Further, for example, the color and brightness of the result image 51d may be changed, and the result image 51d may be enlarged / reduced or deformed.

After the effect display is started, the setting suggestion display is started as shown in FIG. 39 (r). Specifically, a setting suggestion image suggesting a set value (for example, a character image suggesting that the setting value is 4 or more is high, "maybe today" is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 71). After the display of the alert image 51e is completed, the acceptance of the operation of the effect switch 56 is enabled. Therefore, when the effect switch 56 is operated by the player, the menu screen is displayed as shown in FIG. 39 (s). Here, the menu screen is an example of a setting screen for setting the game in relation to the operation of the effect switch 56 and the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, etc. by the player.

The menu screen of this embodiment has a selection image of each item of "two-dimensional code display", "today's result", "end", and "data clear", and "select with STOP button" and "determine with CHANCE button". It is a setting screen including an operation explanation image including each character image of "press and hold the middle button", an image of each stop button, and an image of a production switch. The selection items on the menu screen are not limited to these, and for example, there may be other selection items such as "effect pattern" and "volume / light amount adjustment", and the effect pattern and volume of the effect during the game The amount of light and the like may be adjustable. While the menu screen is being displayed, each image of the result notification (door image 51b, result image 51d) is hidden.

Then, when the player performs an operation to end the display of the menu screen, the display of the menu screen is ended and the display of each image of the result notification is restarted as shown in FIG. 39 (t). If the effect is displayed on the result image 51d before the menu screen is displayed, the effect display on the result image 51d is also restarted when the result notification is restarted after the menu screen is displayed. As shown in FIGS. 39 (s) and 39 (t), the setting suggestion display continues even after the menu screen display starts, and further after the menu screen display ends (after the result notification resumes). are doing.

In the present embodiment, the setting suggestion display is performed using the sub liquid crystal display 71, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the setting suggestion display may be performed using the liquid crystal display 51. For example, when a predetermined period elapses from the start of displaying the alert image 51e, the display of the alert image 51e ends and the effect is displayed on the result image 51d, as shown in FIGS. 40 (p2) and 40 (q2). After the start, as shown in FIG. 40 (r2), the liquid crystal display 51 scrolls the setting suggestion image (for example, the character image of "Today is in great shape !!!" suggesting that the setting value is 6). The display may start with an effect display. At this time, when the effect switch 56 is operated by the player, the menu screen may be displayed as shown in FIG. 40 (s2). In this case, while the menu screen is being displayed, not only each image of the result notification but also the setting suggestion display is hidden. Further, in this case, when the player performs an operation to end the display of the menu screen, as shown in FIG. 40 (t2), the display of the menu screen is terminated, the result notification is restarted, and the setting suggestion display is also displayed. It may be restarted. If the scroll display of the setting suggestion image is performed with the effect display before the menu screen is displayed, the scroll display of the setting suggestion image is also restarted with the effect display when the result notification is restarted after the menu screen is displayed. You may.

In the present embodiment, the setting suggestion display is performed together with the result notification, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the state suggestion display suggesting the state after the next game after the end of the bonus may be performed. For example, when a predetermined period elapses from the start of displaying the alert image 51e, the display of the alert image 51e ends and the effect is displayed on the result image 51d, as shown in FIGS. 41 (p3) and 41 (q3). After the start, as shown in FIG. 41 (r3), a state suggestion image (for example, "ART starts from the next game !!!" suggesting that ART will start from the next game) is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. The scroll display of (character image) may be started with the effect display. At this time, when the effect switch 56 is operated by the player, the menu screen may be displayed as shown in FIG. 41 (s3). In this case, while the menu screen is being displayed, not only each image of the result notification but also the state suggestion display is hidden. Further, in this case, when the player performs an operation to end the display of the menu screen, as shown in FIG. 41 (t3), the display of the menu screen is ended, the result notification is restarted, and the status suggestion display is also displayed. It may be restarted. If the scroll display of the state suggestion image is performed with the effect display before the menu screen is displayed, the scroll display of the state suggestion image is also restarted with the effect display when the result notification is restarted after the menu screen is displayed. You may.

FIG. 42 is a timing chart of the fourth embodiment of the warning display when an error occurs. Next, a fourth embodiment of the control pattern when an error occurs during the warning display at the end of the bonus will be described with reference to FIG. 42.

In the fourth embodiment shown in FIG. 42, similarly to the basic pattern, the sub-control unit 91 starts the warning display at t31, and then starts the result notification at t32 to start updating the display result image 51d. Further, the sub control unit 91 finishes updating the result image 51d at t34 after turning off the bonus lamp at t33. Here, in the fourth embodiment, when an error occurs at t41 after t34 and before the lapse of a predetermined period from t31 (after the lapse of the first visible period), the sub-control unit 91 causes the main control unit 41 to change. Displays an error based on the command received from. The error display is prioritized over the alert display and the result notification. For example, an error screen is displayed in front of the alert image 51e and the result image 51d, and the alert image 51e and the result image 51d become invisible (visual recognition). It will be an impossible period). Further, when the error is resolved at t42 after the error occurs, the sub control unit 91 ends the error display based on the command received from the main control unit 41, and the attention alert image 51e and the result image 51d can be visually recognized again. Become. At this time, the sub-control unit 91 ends the warning display at t43 when a predetermined period (after the lapse of the second visible period) has elapsed from the restart of the warning display. At this time, the sub control unit 91 adds an effect display to the result notification and starts a setting suggestion display. Further, although not shown, the sub control unit 91 turns off the bonus lamp 26 when an error occurs while the bonus lamp 26 is lit, and does not turn on the bonus lamp 26 again even if the error is resolved. Further, when the setting suggestion display is performed before the error occurs, the sub control unit 91 continues the setting suggestion display regardless of whether or not the error has been resolved.

FIG. 44 is a diagram showing an effect example of the fourth embodiment of the warning display when an error occurs.
As a result, in the fourth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 44 (A), when the result notification is performed during the alert display and an error occurs before a predetermined period elapses from the start of the alert display, FIG. 44 As shown in (B), the error display is preferentially displayed, and the warning image 51e of the warning display and the result image 51d of the result notification become invisible. At this time, an error sound is output together with an error display, and the side lamp 27 is turned off. When the error is resolved, as shown in FIG. 44 (C), the error display ends and the attention alert image 51e and the result image 51d become visible again. Then, when a predetermined period (second visible period) elapses from the resumption of the alert display, the alert display ends and only the result notification is performed on the liquid crystal display 51 as shown in FIG. 44 (D). The setting suggestion display is started on the sub liquid crystal display 71. At this time, an effect display is added to the result notification. In the fourth embodiment, the effect display is not added to the setting suggestion display, but the effect display may be added to the setting suggestion display. In this case, if an error occurs while the effect display is added to the setting suggestion display, it is not necessary to add the effect display even if the error is resolved and the setting suggestion display becomes visible again.

FIG. 43 is a timing chart of the fourth embodiment of the warning display when a power failure occurs. Next, a fourth embodiment of the control pattern when a power failure occurs during the warning display at the end of the bonus will be described with reference to FIG. 43.

In the fourth embodiment shown in FIG. 43, similarly to the basic pattern, the sub-control unit 91 starts the alert display at t31, and then starts the result notification at t32 to start updating the display result image 51d. Further, the sub control unit 91 finishes updating the result image 51d at t34 after turning off the bonus lamp at t33. Here, in the fourth embodiment, when a power failure occurs at t44 after t34 and before the lapse of a predetermined period from t31 (after the lapse of the first visible period), the sub-control unit 91 displays a warning display. The result notification is interrupted, and the alert image 51e and the result image 51d become invisible (the invisible period). Further, when the power failure is restored at t45 after the power failure occurs, the sub-control unit 91 restarts the warning display and the result notification, and the warning image 51e of the warning display and the result image 51d of the result notification are visually recognized again. It will be possible. At this time, the sub-control unit 91 ends the warning display at t46 when a predetermined period (after the lapse of the second visible period) has elapsed from the restart of the warning display. At this time, the sub control unit 91 adds an effect display to the result notification and starts a setting suggestion display. Further, although not shown, the bonus lamp 26 is turned off when a power failure occurs while the bonus lamp 26 is lit, but the sub control unit 91 does not turn on the bonus lamp 26 again even if the power failure is restored. Further, when the setting suggestion display is performed before the power failure occurs, the sub control unit 91 resumes the setting suggestion display when the power failure is restored.

FIG. 45 is a diagram showing an production example of the fourth embodiment of the warning display when a power failure occurs.
As a result, in the fourth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 45 (A), when the result notification during the alert display is performed and the power failure occurs before the predetermined period elapses from the start of the alert display, FIG. As shown in 44 (B), the liquid crystal display 51 hides the screen. Further, when the power failure is restored, as shown in FIG. 44C, the warning display and the result notification are restarted, and the warning image 51e of the warning display and the result image 51d of the result notification become visible again. Then, when a predetermined period elapses from the resumption of the warning display, the warning display ends and only the result notification is performed on the liquid crystal display 51 as shown in FIG. 44 (D), while the sub liquid crystal display 71 sets Suggestion display is started. At this time, an effect display is added to the result notification. In the fourth embodiment, if a power failure occurs while the effect display is added to the setting suggestion display, the effect display may not be added even if the power failure is restored and the setting suggestion display is resumed. ..

As described above, according to the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the sub-control unit 91 lights the bonus lamp 26 during the bonus, and turns off the bonus lamp 26 at the end of the bonus while displaying a warning. It is carried out. At this time, t33, which is the timing to turn off the bonus lamp 26, is different from t35, which is the timing to end the warning display.
By doing so, it is possible to reduce that the player's attention to the warning display is deviated from the lighting of the bonus lamp 26 as compared with the slot machine in which the timing of turning off the bonus lamp and the timing of ending the warning display are the same. , It is possible to preferably call the player's attention.

In particular, according to the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, t33, which is the timing to turn off the bonus lamp 26, is a timing before t35, which is the timing to end the warning display.
By doing so, the warning display from the time when the bonus lamp 26 is turned off to the end of the warning display becomes conspicuous, and the game is more suitable than the slot machine which does not end the warning display after the bonus lamp 26 is turned off. It is possible to call attention to a person.
As in the present embodiment, it is preferable that the timing for turning off the bonus lamp 26 is earlier than the timing for ending the warning display, but the timing is not limited to this, and the timing for turning off the bonus lamp 26 is not limited to this. The timing may be later than the timing when the warning display ends,
In the present embodiment, the lighting of the bonus lamp 26 is illustrated as an example of the advantageous suggestion display and the advantageous state display, but the lighting is not limited to this, and for example, the liquid crystal display 51 and the sub liquid crystal display 71 may have an image during the bonus. A bonus suggestion image may be displayed.

Further, according to the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the sub control unit 91 adds an effect display to the result notification, starts a setting suggestion display, and displays a menu screen at t35 when the warning display ends. It is possible to display it, and at t35, the operation of the effect switch 56 by the player is enabled, at t36, an effect display is added to the result notification, and at t37, the setting suggestion display is started.
By doing this, you should be more careful than a slot machine that can add an effect display to the result notification, start a setting suggestion display, and display a menu screen regardless of the end of the alert display. It is possible to reduce that the player's attention to the arousal display deviates from the result notification (effect display), the setting suggestion display, and the menu screen display, and it is possible to preferably call the player's attention.
In the present embodiment, as an example of predetermined control, an effect display to the result notification is added, a setting suggestion display and a menu screen are displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a freeze operation or a newly provided movable state is illustrated. You may perform an effect of operating the accessory.

Further, according to the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the sub-control unit 91 gives a result notification at the end of the bonus, and the result notification result image 51d at t33, which is the timing when the bonus lamp 26 is turned off. We are updating.
By doing so, the update period of the result notification result image 51d can be shortened as compared with the slot machine that does not update the result notification when the bonus lamp is turned off, and the player is preferably alerted. Can be done.
It is preferable to update the result notification result image 51d when the bonus lamp 26 is turned off as in the present embodiment, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, before the bonus lamp 26 is turned off. The update of the result notification result image 51d may be completed, or the update of the result notification result image 51d may be started after the bonus lamp 26 is turned off.

Further, according to the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the sub-control unit 91 ends the warning display at t35 after t34, which is the timing when the update of the result notification result image 51d ends.
By doing so, the warning display from the end of the update of the result notification to the end of the warning display becomes conspicuous, and the game is more suitable than the slot machine that does not end the warning display after the update of the result notification is completed. It is possible to call attention to a person.
As in the present embodiment, it is preferable to end the warning display after the update of the result notification result image 51d is completed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and caution is taken before the update of the result notification result image 51d is completed. You may end the awakening display.

Further, according to the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the sub control unit 91 adds an effect display to the result notification result image 51d at t36 after t35, which is the timing to end the warning display. ..
By doing so, it is possible to reduce the player's attention to the alert display from being deviated to the result notification and effect display compared to the slot machine in which the effect display is added to the result notification regardless of the end of the alert display. It is possible to preferably call attention to the player.
As in the present embodiment, it is preferable to add an effect display to the result notification result image 51d after the warning display is finished, but the result is not limited to this, and the result notification is sent before the warning display is finished. An effect display may be added to the result image 51d.
In the present embodiment, the effect display is added to the result notification result image 51d as an example of the predetermined control, but the effect display may not be added to the result notification result image 51d.

Further, according to the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the sub-control unit 91 performs the setting suggestion display at t37, which is the timing at which the warning display ends.
By doing so, it is possible to reduce the player's attention to the setting suggestion display from the slot machine that displays the setting suggestion regardless of the end of the warning display, and to pay attention to the player. It can encourage arousal.
It is preferable to start the setting suggestion display after the warning display is finished as in the present embodiment, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the setting suggestion display may be started before the warning display is finished. ..
In the present embodiment, the setting suggestion display is performed each time the bonus ends, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the setting suggestion display may be performed only at the end of the first hit bonus, and the bonus a predetermined number of times. The setting suggestion display may be performed at each end.
In the present embodiment, the setting suggestion display is performed as an example of the predetermined control, but the setting suggestion display may not be performed.

Further, according to the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the sub control unit 91 can receive the operation of the production switch 56 by the player after the end of each game and display the menu screen. While the operation of the effect switch 56 by the player is invalidated when the caution display is being performed, the operation of the effect switch 56 by the player is enabled at t35, which is the timing at which the caution display ends. .. That is, the sub-control unit 91 does not display the menu screen even if the effect switch 56 is operated by the player while the attention alert display is being performed, while the effect switch 56 is performed by the player after the attention alert display is completed. When is operated, the menu screen is displayed.
By doing so, not only after the warning display is finished, but also when the warning display is being performed, the warning display is displayed rather than the slot machine that displays the menu screen when the production switch is operated by the player. It is possible to reduce the player's attention to the display of the menu screen, and it is possible to preferably call the player's attention.
It should be noted that, as in the present embodiment, it is preferable that the menu screen can be displayed by accepting the operation of the effect switch 56 by the player after the warning display is finished, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be possible to accept the operation of the effect switch 56 by the player and display the menu screen before the awakening display is finished.
In the present embodiment, as an example of predetermined control, the operation of the effect switch 56 by the player is accepted and the menu screen is displayed, but the operation of the effect switch 56 by the player is accepted and the menu screen is displayed. It may not be necessary, and the menu screen may not be displayed regardless of the operation of the player.

Further, according to the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the sub-control unit 91 displays a liquid crystal display on which the warning image 51e of the warning display is displayed when the operation of the effect switch 56 by the player is effectively accepted. The menu screen is displayed on the device 51.
By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from displaying the caution image 51e on the liquid crystal display 51 when the menu screen is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and the menu screen is displayed on the liquid crystal display. It is possible to call attention to the player more preferably than a slot machine that displays a warning image on the same liquid crystal display when the screen is on.
In the present embodiment, the menu screen is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 on which the alert image 51e is displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the menu screen may be displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 71. Good. Even in this case, it is preferable that the menu screen can be displayed by accepting the operation of the effect switch 56 by the player after the attention alert display is finished.

Further, according to the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the sub control unit 91 can display the menu screen when the effect switch 56 is operated by the player while the result image 51d is displayed as the result notification. The result image 51d is displayed again when the display of the menu screen is started, while the result image 51d is displayed again when the display of the menu screen is finished.
By doing so, the slot machine that the display of the result notification result image 51d ends or resumes by displaying the menu screen not only after the warning display ends but also when the warning display is performed. It is possible to reduce the deviation of the player's attention to the alert display from the display of the image 51d as a result of the result notification, and it is possible to preferably alert the player to the alert display.
In the present embodiment, when the result image 51d is displayed as the result notification, the menu screen can be displayed when the effect switch 56 is operated by the player, but when the result image 51d is displayed. Even if the effect switch 56 is operated by the player, the menu screen may not be displayed. Further, in the present embodiment, the display of the result image 51d is finished when the display of the menu screen is started, and the result image 51d is displayed again when the display of the menu screen is finished, but the present invention is not limited to this, for example. The result image 51d may be displayed in a display area different from the display area of the menu screen (for example, the sub liquid crystal display 71) without ending the display of the result image 51d when the display of the menu screen is started. Even when the display of the result image 51d is finished, it is not necessary to display the result image 51d again when the display of the menu screen is finished.

Further, according to the slot machine 1 according to the modified example of the present embodiment, the sub-control unit 91 operates the effect switch 56 by the player even when the setting suggestion display is performed as well as the result notification. When the menu screen display starts, not only the result image 51d is displayed but also the setting suggestion display ends, while when the menu screen display ends, not only the result image 51d but also the setting is set. The suggestion display is also displayed again.
By doing so, not only after the warning display is finished, but also when the warning display is being performed, the setting suggestion display is finished or restarted by the display of the menu screen. It is possible to reduce the deviation of the player's attention to the setting suggestion display, and it is possible to preferably call the player's attention.
In the modified example, the menu screen can be displayed when the effect switch 56 is operated by the player while the setting suggestion is displayed, but the effect switch 56 is displayed by the player when the setting suggestion is displayed. The menu screen may not be displayed even if is operated. Further, in the present embodiment, the setting suggestion display is ended when the menu screen display is started, and the setting suggestion display is restarted when the menu screen display is finished, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the embodiment. The setting suggestion display may be continued on the sub liquid crystal display 71 when the menu screen display is started as in the above, and the setting suggestion is made when the menu screen display is finished even when the setting suggestion display is finished. It is not necessary to restart the display.

Further, according to the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the sub-control unit 91 displays a warning until a predetermined period from t31 to t35, which is the timing at which the bonus ends, elapses, while displaying a warning after t35. The setting suggestion display is continued even after a predetermined period elapses from t37, and the display period of the setting suggestion display is longer than the display period of the caution display.
By doing so, the display period of the setting suggestion display is not longer than the display period of the warning display. The warning display is prolonged longer than the slot machine, and it is difficult for the player to feel that the warning display is troublesome. It is possible to preferably call the player's attention.
As in the present embodiment, it is preferable that the display period of the setting suggestion display is longer than the display period of the warning display, but even if the display period of the setting suggestion display is shorter than the display period of the warning display. Often, the display period of the setting suggestion display may be shorter than the predetermined period.

According to the slot machine 1 according to the modified example of the present embodiment, the effect display is added to the setting suggestion display, while the effect display is not added to the caution display.
By doing so, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel that the display of the warning display is more troublesome than the slot machine in which the effect display is added not only to the setting suggestion display but also to the warning display, which is preferable. It is possible to call attention to the player.
In the modified example, the effect display is added to the setting suggestion display, but it is not necessary to add the effect display to the setting suggestion display as in the present embodiment.

Further, according to the slot machine 1 according to the modified example of the present embodiment, the setting suggestion display is a moving image display of a scroll display, while the caution display is a display of a caution image 51e as a still image.
By doing so, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel that the display of the warning display is more troublesome than the slot machine, which is a moving image display such as a scroll display, as well as the setting suggestion display. , It is possible to preferably call the player's attention.
In the modified example, the setting suggestion display is scrolled as an example of the moving image display, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a moving image display in which the character corresponding to each setting value operates may be used.
In the modified example, the setting suggestion display is a scroll display moving image display, but the setting suggestion display may be a still image display as in the present embodiment. In this case, the still image may be a still image of the character corresponding to each set value, or the set value may be suggested by a combination of the still image of the character and the still image of the item.

Further, according to the slot machine 1 according to the modified example of the present embodiment, the sub control unit 91 displays a warning from t35 until a predetermined period from t31 to t35, which is the timing at which the bonus ends, elapses. The state suggestion display is continued even after a predetermined period elapses from t37 later, and the display period of the state suggestion display is longer than the display period of the caution display.
By doing so, the display period of the state suggestion display is not longer than the display period of the warning display. The warning display is prolonged longer than the slot machine, and it is difficult for the player to feel that the warning display is troublesome. It is possible to preferably call the player's attention.
It is preferable that the display period of the state suggestion display is longer than the display period of the warning display as in the modified example, but the display period of the state suggestion display may be shorter than the display period of the warning display. , The display period of the state suggestion display may be shorter than the predetermined period.
In the modified example, the state suggestion display is performed each time the bonus ends, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the state suggestion display may be performed only at the end of the first hit bonus, and the bonus ends a predetermined number of times. The state suggestion display may be performed every hour.

Further, according to the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the sub-control unit 91 displays a warning until a predetermined period from t31 to t35, which is the timing at which the bonus ends, elapses, while the result image 51d from t32. As for the result notification that started the update, the effect display is added to t36 after the update period elapses from t32, and it is continuously performed even after the predetermined period elapses from t32, and the result notification result image 51d The display period is longer than the display period of the alert display.
According to such a configuration, the display period of the result image of the result notification is not longer than the display period of the warning display. The feeling that the warning display is troublesome for the player by prolonging the warning display compared to the slot machine. It is possible to make it difficult to hold the player, and it is possible to preferably call the player's attention.
As in the present embodiment, it is preferable that the display period of the result notification result image 51d is longer than the display period of the warning display, but the display period of the result image 51d is longer than the display period of the warning display. It may be short, and the display period of the result image 51d may be shorter than the predetermined period.

Further, according to the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, if a power failure occurs while the warning display is being performed, the warning display is hidden and therefore invisible to the player. Further, when the sub-control unit 91 recovers from the power failure after the power failure occurs while the warning display is being performed, the warning display is performed again for a predetermined period, and the warning display is performed. Becomes visible to the player again.
By doing so, it is possible to more preferably alert the player to the alert than the slot machine in which the alert display is not performed again for a predetermined period when the power is restored from the power failure.
As in the present embodiment, it is preferable that the warning display is performed again for a predetermined period when the power is restored after the power failure occurs when the warning display is being performed. The warning display may be performed again for a period shorter than a predetermined period when the power is restored from the power failure, and the warning display may not be displayed when the power is restored from the power failure. Even if the warning display is performed again for a period shorter than the predetermined period, the total of the display period of the warning display before the power failure and the display period of the warning display after recovery from the power failure. It is preferable that the period is a predetermined period or longer.

Further, according to the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, if an electric power failure occurs while the bonus lamp 26 is lit, the bonus lamp 26 is turned off, so that the player cannot see the bonus lamp 26. The bonus lamp 26 is not turned on again even if the power is restored from the power failure after the power failure occurs while the 26 is lit.
By doing so, it is possible to reduce the player's attention to the warning display from being deviated to the re-lighting of the bonus lamp as compared with the slot machine that re-lights the bonus lamp when recovering from the power failure. Can call attention to.
It should be noted that, as in the present embodiment, it is preferable not to turn on the bonus lamp 26 again even if the power is restored after the power failure occurs while the bonus lamp 26 is on, but the bonus lamp 26 is turned on. The bonus lamp 26 may be turned on again when the power is restored from the power failure after the power failure occurs. By doing so, it is possible to confirm whether or not the bonus lamp 26 has failed when the power is restored from the power failure. Even in this case, it is preferable that the timing for turning off the bonus lamp 26 and the timing for ending the warning display are different.

Further, according to the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, if a power failure occurs while the bonus lamp 26 is turned off, the sub control unit 91 does not turn on the bonus lamp 26 even if the power failure is restored.
By doing so, it is possible to reduce the player's attention to the warning display from being deviated from the lighting of the bonus lamp 26 as compared with the slot machine that lights the bonus lamp when recovering from the power failure, and it is suitable for the player. It can call attention.
It is preferable that the bonus lamp 26 is not turned on even if the power is restored after the power is cut off while the bonus lamp 26 is turned off as in the present embodiment, but the bonus lamp 26 is being turned off. The bonus lamp 26 may be turned on when the power is restored from the power failure after the power failure occurs. By doing so, it is possible to confirm whether or not the bonus lamp 26 has failed when the power is restored from the power failure.

Further, according to the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, if a power failure occurs while the setting suggestion display is being performed, the setting suggestion display is hidden and therefore invisible to the player. Further, the sub-control unit 91 performs the setting suggestion display again when the setting suggestion display is performed and the power failure is restored after the power failure occurs, and the setting suggestion display is displayed to the player. It becomes visible again.
By doing so, the player's attention to the warning display that the setting suggestion display is not performed again on the sub liquid crystal display 71 than the slot machine that does not perform the setting suggestion display again when the power is restored. It is possible to reduce the deviation of the liquid crystal, and it is possible to preferably call the player's attention.
As in the present embodiment, when the setting suggestion display is performed before the power failure occurs, it is preferable to perform the setting suggestion display when the power is restored from the power failure, but the setting suggestion display is not limited to this, for example. Even when the setting suggestion display is performed before the power failure occurs, the setting suggestion display may be performed when the warning display is restarted after the power failure is restored and a predetermined period has elapsed.

Further, according to the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the sub-control unit 91 performs the setting suggestion display when the setting suggestion display is not performed before the power failure occurs and when the power failure is restored. Instead, the warning display is resumed and the setting suggestion display is performed at t46 after a predetermined period has passed.
By doing so, it is possible to reduce the player's attention to the setting suggestion display from the slot machine that displays the setting suggestion when recovering from the power failure, and it is possible to preferably alert the player. Can be encouraged.
As in the present embodiment, when the setting suggestion display is not performed before the power failure occurs, the setting suggestion display is performed when the warning display is restarted after the power failure is restored and the predetermined period elapses. It is preferable, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, when the setting suggestion display is not performed before the power failure occurs, the setting suggestion display may be performed when the power failure is restored.

According to the slot machine 1 according to the modified example of the present embodiment, when the sub-control unit 91 recovers from the power failure when the setting suggestion display is performed with the effect display before the power failure occurs. The setting suggestion display is restarted without adding the effect display.
By doing so, it is possible to reduce the player's attention to the warning display from being deviated from the setting suggestion display as compared with the slot machine in which the setting suggestion display is performed again with the effect display when the power is restored. It is possible to call attention to the player.
In addition, as in the change example, when the setting suggestion display is performed with the effect display before the power failure occurs, the setting suggestion display can be restarted without adding the effect display when recovering from the power failure. Preferably, when the setting suggestion display is performed with the effect display before the power failure occurs, the setting suggestion display may be restarted with the effect display added when the power failure is restored.

Further, according to the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, if a power failure occurs during the result notification, the result image 51d during the result notification is hidden, so that the player cannot see it. Further, the sub-control unit 91 performs the result notification again when the power is restored from the power failure after the power failure occurs during the result notification, and the result image 51d becomes visible to the player again.
By doing so, it is possible to reduce the player's attention to the warning display that the result notification is not performed again as compared with the slot machine that does not perform the result notification again when the power is restored, which is preferable. It is possible to call attention to the player.
As in the present embodiment, it is preferable to perform the result notification again when the power failure is restored after the power failure occurs during the result notification, but the power failure occurs after the power failure occurs during the result notification. It is not necessary to re-notify the result when recovering from.

Further, according to the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the effect display is added to the result notification result image 51d before the power failure occurs, the effect display is added when the power failure is restored. The display of the result image 51d is restarted in this state.
By doing so, it is less likely that the player will feel uncomfortable with the display of the result image 51d that is performed again by the player than the slot machine that does not display the result image 51d again with the effect display when the power is restored. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the player's attention to the alert display from being deviated from the display of the result image 51d, and it is possible to preferably alert the player to the alert display.
As in the present embodiment, when the effect display is added to the result notification result image 51d before the power failure occurs, the result image 51d is in a state where the effect display is added when the power failure is restored. It is preferable to restart the display, but when the effect display is added to the result notification result image 51d before the power failure occurs, the effect display is not added and the result image 51d is displayed when the power failure is restored. May be restarted.

Further, according to the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the sub-control unit 91 recovers from the power failure after the power failure occurs during the warning display, the warning display is displayed again. The operation of the effect switch 56 by the player is enabled from t46 after the predetermined period has elapsed.
By doing so, the player operates the production switch 56 rather than the slot machine that does not invalidate the operation of the production switch by the player until a predetermined period of time elapses after the power is restored, and the menu screen is displayed. By displaying the display, it is possible to reduce the player's attention to the alert display from being deviated from the display on the menu screen, and it is possible to preferably alert the player to the alert display.
It should be noted that, as in the present embodiment, when the warning display is performed, the player recovers from the power failure after the power failure occurs, the warning display is performed again, and the predetermined period elapses. It is preferable to enable the operation of the effect switch 56, but the operation is not limited to this, and the warning display is restarted after the power failure occurs when the warning display is being performed. At that time, the operation of the effect switch 56 by the player may be enabled.

Further, according to the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, if an error occurs while the warning display is being performed, the warning display becomes invisible to the player due to the error display that is preferentially displayed. Further, when the error is resolved after the error occurs while the warning display is being performed, the sub-control unit 91 ends the error display and hides the warning display to the player. On the other hand, it becomes visible again, and the warning display is performed again for a predetermined period.
By doing so, it is possible to more preferably alert the player to the alert than the slot machine in which the alert display is not performed again for a predetermined period when the error is resolved.
It should be noted that, as in the present embodiment, it is preferable to perform the warning display again for a predetermined period when the error is resolved after the error occurs while the warning display is being performed, but this is limited to this. However, when the error is resolved, the alert display may be performed again for a period shorter than a predetermined period, and when the error is resolved, the alert display may not be performed. Even if the warning display is performed again for a period shorter than the specified period, the total period of the warning display display period before the error occurs and the warning display display period after the error is resolved is specified. It is preferably longer than the period.

Further, according to the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the sub-control unit 91 turns off the bonus lamp 26 when an error occurs while the bonus lamp 26 is lit, and re-uses the bonus lamp 26 even if the error is recovered. not light.
By doing so, it is possible to reduce the player's attention to the warning display from being deviated to the re-lighting of the bonus lamp as compared with the slot machine that re-lights the bonus lamp when the error is resolved, and it is suitable for the player. It can call attention.
As in the present embodiment, it is preferable not to relight the bonus lamp 26 even if the error is resolved after the error occurs while the bonus lamp 26 is lit, but the bonus lamp 26 is being lit. The bonus lamp 26 may be turned on again when the error is resolved after the error has occurred. By doing so, it is possible to confirm whether or not the bonus lamp 26 has failed when the error is resolved. Even in this case, it is preferable that the timing for turning off the bonus lamp 26 and the timing for ending the warning display are different.

Further, according to the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, if an error occurs while the bonus lamp 26 is off, the sub control unit 91 does not turn on the bonus lamp 26 even if the error is resolved.
By doing so, it is possible to reduce the player's attention to the warning display from being deviated from the lighting of the bonus lamp 26 as compared with the slot machine that lights the bonus lamp when the error is resolved, and the player is preferably warned. It can encourage arousal.
As in the present embodiment, it is preferable not to turn on the bonus lamp 26 even if the error is resolved after the error occurs while the bonus lamp 26 is off, but an error occurs while the bonus lamp 26 is off. The bonus lamp 26 may be turned on when the error is resolved after the occurrence of. By doing so, it is possible to confirm whether or not the bonus lamp 26 has failed when the error is resolved.

Further, according to the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, if an error occurs while the setting suggestion display is being performed, the sub control unit 91 continues the setting suggestion display regardless of whether or not the error has been resolved. To do.
By doing this, the player's attention to the alert display is set rather than the slot machine that ends the setting suggestion display when an error occurs and the slot machine that ends the setting suggestion display when the error is resolved. It is possible to reduce deviation from the end of the suggestion display, and it is possible to preferably alert the player.
As in the present embodiment, when the setting suggestion display is performed before the error occurs, it is preferable to display the setting suggestion when the error is resolved, but the setting suggestion display is not limited to this, and for example, the error may occur. Even when the setting suggestion display is performed before the occurrence, the setting suggestion display may be performed when the error is resolved and the warning display is restarted and a predetermined period elapses.

Further, according to the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the setting suggestion display is not performed before the error occurs, the setting suggestion display is not performed and the warning display is restarted when the power is restored from the power failure. The setting suggestion is displayed at t43 after the predetermined period has passed.
By doing so, it is possible to reduce the player's attention to the setting suggestion display from the slot machine that displays the setting suggestion when the error is resolved, and to appropriately alert the player. Can be prompted.
As in the present embodiment, when the setting suggestion display is not performed before the error occurs, the setting suggestion display may be performed when the error is resolved and the warning display is restarted and a predetermined period elapses. It is preferable, but not limited to this, for example, when the setting suggestion display is not performed before the error occurs, the setting suggestion display may be performed when the error is resolved.

According to the slot machine 1 according to the modified example of the present embodiment, when the setting suggestion display is performed with the effect display before the error occurs, the effect display is not added when the error is resolved. The setting suggestion is displayed in.
By doing so, it is possible to reduce the player's attention to the setting suggestion display from the slot machine that displays the setting suggestion display with the effect display when the error is resolved, and it is preferable for the player. Can call attention to.
As in the change example, when the setting suggestion display is performed with the effect display before the error occurs, it is preferable to restart the setting suggestion display without adding the effect display when the error is resolved. , If the setting suggestion display is performed with the effect display before the error occurs, the setting suggestion display may be restarted with the effect display added when the error is resolved.

Further, according to the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when an error occurs during the result notification, the result image 51d during the result notification becomes invisible to the player due to the error display which is preferentially displayed. Further, when the error is resolved after the error occurs during the result notification, the sub-control unit 91 ends the error display and hides it, so that the display of the result image 51d is visually recognized by the player again. It becomes possible, and the result notification is performed again.
By doing so, it is possible to reduce the player's attention to the warning display that the result notification is not performed again as compared with the slot machine that does not perform the result notification again when the error is resolved, which is preferable. It is possible to call attention to the player.
As in the present embodiment, it is preferable to perform the result notification again when the error is resolved after the error occurs during the result notification, but when the error is resolved after the error occurs during the result notification. It is not necessary to re-notify the result.

Further, according to the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the effect display is added to the result notification result image 51d before the error occurs, the effect display is added when the error is resolved. The display of the result image 51d is restarted with.
By doing so, when the error is resolved, the player is less likely to feel uncomfortable with the display of the result image 51d that is performed again than the slot machine that does not display the result image 51d again with the effect display. It is possible to reduce the deviation of the player's attention to the attention alert display from the display of the result image 51d, and it is possible to preferably alert the player to the alert display.
As in the present embodiment, when the effect display is added to the result notification result image 51d before the error occurs, the result image 51d is displayed with the effect display added when the error is resolved. It is preferable to restart, but when the effect display is added to the result notification result image 51d before the error occurs, when the error is resolved, the effect display is not added and the display of the result image 51d is restarted. May be good.

Further, according to the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the sub-control unit 91 re-displays the warning when the error is resolved after the error occurs while the warning display is being performed. The operation of the effect switch 56 by the player is enabled from t43 after the predetermined period has elapsed.
By doing so, the effect switch 56 is operated by the player and the menu screen is displayed rather than the slot machine that does not invalidate the operation of the effect switch by the player until a predetermined period elapses after the error is resolved. By doing so, it is possible to reduce that the player's attention to the alert display deviates from the display on the menu screen, and it is possible to preferably alert the player to the alert display.
It should be noted that, as in the present embodiment, after an error occurs while the warning display is being performed, the error is resolved and the warning display is performed again, and when a predetermined period has elapsed, the player is responsible for the production. It is preferable to enable the operation of the switch 56, but the game is not limited to this, and when the error is resolved and the alert display is resumed after the error occurs while the alert display is being performed. The operation of the effect switch 56 by a person may be enabled.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the slot machine has been described as an example of the gaming machine, but the configuration disclosed in the above-described embodiment, particularly the configuration in which the effect is executed according to the effect pattern shown in the timing charts of FIGS. A game is played by launching a game ball into a game machine, for example, a game area, and the launched game ball enters a winning opening provided in the game area to generate a prize, and the game is played as a prize ball. It may be applied to a pachinko game machine or the like where a ball is paid out. When applied to a pachinko gaming machine, for example, when an error or power failure is displayed in the result notification at the end of the jackpot game state, an error or power failure occurs and the result notification or the warning display is visually recognized by the player. A configuration may be applied in which the warning display is displayed again for a predetermined period so that the player can see the error when the error is eliminated or the power failure is restored after the failure.

Further, for example, the jackpot lamp is lit in the jackpot game state, the jackpot lamp is turned off at the end of the jackpot game state, and a warning display is performed, and the warning display ends when the jackpot lamp is turned off. A configuration different from the timing may be applied, and at the timing when the alert display ends, an effect display is added to the result notification, a setting suggestion display is started, and the player accepts the operation of the production switch. A configuration that enables the display of a menu screen may be applied. Further, for example, the sub-control unit can accept the operation of the production switch by the player after the end of each special figure game and display the menu screen, and when the warning display is performed. A configuration may be applied in which the menu screen is not displayed even if the effect switch is operated by the player, while the menu screen is displayed when the effect switch is operated by the player after the end of the alert display. Further, for example, a warning display is displayed from the timing when the jackpot game state ends until a predetermined period elapses, while a setting suggestion display is performed after the predetermined period elapses, and a predetermined period is set after the setting suggestion display is started. A configuration may be applied in which the display period of the setting suggestion display is longer than the display period of the warning display by continuing the operation even after the lapse of time.

(A-1) As described above, in the present application,
A gaming machine that plays a game (for example, a slot machine 1, a pachinko gaming machine).
Advantageous state control means (for example, main control unit 41) that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous for the player (for example, a bonus for slot machine 1, ART, a big hit game state for a pachinko game machine, and a small hit game state). Is a process that controls bonuses and ART),
Advantageous suggestion display means (for example, a process in which the sub control unit 91 lights the bonus lamp 26) for displaying the advantageous suggestion (for example, lighting the bonus lamp 26) suggesting an event related to the control of the advantageous state (for example, during the bonus). When,
A warning display means (for example, the sub control unit 91 ends the bonus) that performs a warning display (for example, a warning display, a warning image 51e) for calling the player to call attention in connection with the end of control of the advantageous state. It is equipped with a process that sometimes displays a warning.
The advantageous suggestion display means ends the advantageous suggestion display in connection with the end of the control of the advantageous state (for example, the sub control unit 91 turns off the bonus lamp 26 at t33 after the end of the bonus).
The end timing of the advantageous suggestion display is different from the end timing of the warning display (for example, different from t33, which is the timing when the bonus lamp 26 is turned off, and t35, which is the timing when the warning display is ended).
Effectiveness of the player's operation of the effect switch 56 for adding an effect display to the result notification result image 51d, setting suggestion display, and displaying a menu screen in connection with the end of the warning display. (For example, at t35, which is the end timing of the alert display, the effect display is added to the result notification result image 51d, the setting suggestion display, and the effect switch 56 by the player for displaying the menu screen. (It enables the operation to be enabled), and the game machine is disclosed.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to reduce that the player's attention to the warning display deviates from the advantage suggestion display as compared with the game machine in which the end timing of the advantage suggestion display and the end timing of the caution display are the same, which is preferable. It is possible to call attention to the player. Further, according to such a configuration, it is possible to reduce that the player's attention to the warning display is deviated from the occurrence of the predetermined event as compared with the game machine that generates the predetermined event regardless of whether or not the warning display is terminated. It is possible to preferably call attention to the player.
In the present application, the "advantageous suggestion display suggesting an event related to the control of the advantageous state" also includes an advantageous state display indicating that the advantageous state is controlled by the light emission of the light emitting means.
Therefore, in the present application,
A gaming machine that plays a game (for example, a slot machine 1, a pachinko gaming machine).
Advantageous state control means (for example, main control unit 41) that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous for the player (for example, a bonus for slot machine 1, ART, a big hit game state for a pachinko game machine, and a small hit game state). Is a process that controls bonuses and ART),
The advantageous state display means (for example, the sub control unit 91) that displays the advantageous state (for example, lighting the bonus lamp 26) indicating that the advantageous state is controlled by the light emission of the light emitting means (for example, the bonus lamp 26) is a bonus. (Processing to turn on the lamp 26) and
A warning display means (for example, the sub control unit 91 ends the bonus) that performs a warning display (for example, a warning display, a warning image 51e) for calling the player to call attention in connection with the end of control of the advantageous state. It is equipped with a process that sometimes displays a warning.
The advantage suggestion display means ends the advantage state display in connection with the end of control of the advantage state (for example, the sub control unit 91 turns off the bonus lamp 26 at t33 after the end of the bonus).
The end timing of the advantageous state display is different from the end timing of the warning display (for example, t33, which is the timing when the bonus lamp 26 is turned off, and t35, which is the timing when the warning display is ended).
Effectiveness of the player's operation of the effect switch 56 for adding an effect display to the result notification result image 51d, setting suggestion display, and displaying a menu screen in connection with the end of the warning display. (For example, at t35, which is the end timing of the alert display, the effect display is added to the result notification result image 51d, the setting suggestion display, and the effect switch 56 by the player for displaying the menu screen. (It enables the operation to be enabled), and the game machine is also disclosed.
Further, in the present application, the "warning display for urging the player to call attention" also includes a suppression display for urging the player to excessively suppress the game.
Therefore, in the present application,
A gaming machine that plays a game (for example, a slot machine 1, a pachinko gaming machine).
Advantageous state control means (for example, main control unit 41) that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous for the player (for example, a bonus for slot machine 1, ART, a big hit game state for a pachinko game machine, and a small hit game state). Is a process that controls bonuses and ART),
Advantageous suggestion display means (for example, a process in which the sub control unit 91 lights the bonus lamp 26) for displaying the advantageous suggestion (for example, lighting the bonus lamp 26) suggesting an event related to the control of the advantageous state (for example, during the bonus). When,
Suppression display means (for example, the sub-control unit 91 is a bonus) that performs a suppression display (for example, a warning display, a display of a warning image 51e) that prompts the player to suppress excessive games in connection with the end of control of the advantageous state. (Processing to display a warning at the end)
The advantageous suggestion display means ends the advantageous suggestion display in connection with the end of the control of the advantageous state (for example, the sub control unit 91 turns off the bonus lamp 26 at t33 after the end of the bonus).
The end timing of the advantageous suggestion display is different from the end timing of the suppression display (for example, t33, which is the timing when the bonus lamp 26 is turned off, and t35, which is the timing when the caution display is ended).
In connection with the end of the suppression display, a predetermined event (for example, addition of an effect display to the result notification result image 51d, a setting suggestion display, and activation of the operation of the effect switch 56 by the player for displaying the menu screen). ) Is generated (for example, at t35, which is the end timing of the alert display, the effect display is added to the result notification result image 51d, the setting suggestion display, and the operation of the effect switch 56 by the player to display the menu screen. (It enables the activation of), and the game machine is also disclosed.

(A-2) Further, in the present application,
The gaming machine also ends the warning display after the advantageous suggestion display ends (for example, t33, which is the timing when the bonus lamp 26 is turned off, is before the timing t35, which ends the warning display). It is disclosed.

According to such a configuration, the warning display from the end of the advantageous suggestion display to the end of the warning display becomes conspicuous, which is more preferable than the gaming machine that does not end the warning display after the end of the advantageous suggestion display. It is possible to call attention to the player.

(A-3) Further, in the present application,
Advantageous result display means (for example, sub-control unit 91 is a bonus) that displays an advantageous result (for example, result notification, display of a result image 51d) that notifies the result of controlling the advantageous state in relation to the end of control of the advantageous state. (Processing to notify the result at the end)
The advantageous result display means updates the advantageous result display when the advantageous suggestion display is finished (for example, the sub control unit 91 notifies the result at t33, which is the timing when the bonus lamp 26 is turned off. As a result of the above, the image 51d has been updated), and the game machine is also disclosed.

According to such a configuration, the update period of the advantageous result display can be shortened as compared with the game machine that does not update the advantageous result display when the advantageous suggestion display is finished, and the player is preferably alerted. Can be done.

(A-4) Further, in the present application,
Advantageous result display means (for example, sub-control unit 91 is a bonus) that displays an advantageous result (for example, result notification, display of a result image 51d) that notifies the result of controlling the advantageous state in relation to the end of control of the advantageous state. (Processing to notify the result at the end)
The alert display means ends the alert display after the update of the advantageous result display is completed (for example, at t35 after t34, which is the timing when the sub-control unit 91 ends the update of the result notification result image 51d. (Ends the warning display), the game machine is also disclosed.

According to such a configuration, the warning display from the end of the update of the advantageous result display to the end of the warning display becomes conspicuous, and the warning display is not finished after the update of the advantageous result display is completed. It is possible to preferably call attention to the player.

(A-5) Further, in the present application,
Advantageous result display means (for example, sub-control unit 91 is a bonus) that displays an advantageous result (for example, result notification, display of a result image 51d) that notifies the result of controlling the advantageous state in relation to the end of control of the advantageous state. (Processing to notify the result at the end)
An effect display is added to the advantageous result display in connection with the end of the warning display (for example, a result image of the result notification at t36 after t35, which is the timing when the sub-control unit 91 ends the warning display. An effect display is added to 51d), and a game machine is also disclosed.

According to such a configuration, the player's attention to the warning display deviates from the advantageous result display and the effect display as compared with the game machine in which the effect display is added to the advantageous result display regardless of the end of the warning display. It can be reduced, and the player can be preferably alerted.

(A-6) Further, in the present application,
A setting suggestion display (for example, a setting) that suggests a setting value selected from a plurality of types of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 6) having different advantages to the player in relation to the end of the warning display. Also disclosed is a gaming machine provided with a setting suggestion display means (for example, a process of performing a setting suggestion display at t37 after t35, which is the timing at which the sub-control unit 91 ends the warning display). There is.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the player's attention to the setting suggestion display from the game machine that performs the setting suggestion display regardless of the end of the setting suggestion display, and it is suitable for the player. It can call attention.

(A-7) Also, in the present application,
Each of the setting screen display means (for example, the sub control unit 91) can display the setting screen (menu screen) for setting the game in relation to the operation of the setting operation means (for example, the effect switch 56) by the player. (Processing to accept the operation of the production switch 56 by the player and display the menu screen after the end of the game) is provided.
While the operation of the setting operation means by the player is invalidated when the warning display is being performed, the operation of the setting operation means by the player is enabled in connection with the end of the warning display ( For example, the sub-control unit 91 invalidates the operation of the effect switch 56 by the player when the caution display is being performed, while the effect switch by the player at t35, which is the timing to end the attention display. 56 operations are enabled), and game machines are also disclosed.

According to such a configuration, when the setting operation means is operated by the player not only after the warning display is finished but also when the warning display is performed, the warning is called more than the game machine that displays the setting screen. It is possible to reduce that the player's attention to the display deviates from the display on the setting screen, and it is possible to preferably call the player's attention.

(A-8) Further, in the present application,
A setting suggestion display (for example, a setting) suggesting a setting value selected from a plurality of types of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 6) having different advantages for the player in relation to the end of control of the advantageous state. It is provided with a setting suggestion display means (for example, a process of performing a setting suggestion display at t37 after t35, which is the timing at which the sub-control unit 91 ends the alert display).
A gaming machine is also disclosed in which the display period of the setting suggestion display is longer than the display period of the warning display (for example, the display period of the setting suggestion display is longer than the display period of the warning display).

According to such a configuration, the display period of the setting suggestion display is not longer than the display period of the warning display, and the player feels that the warning display is troublesome by prolonging the warning display compared to the gaming machine. It can be made difficult, and the player can be preferably alerted.

(A-9) Further, in the present application,
A state suggestion display (for example, a state suggestion display) that suggests a state in the game after the control end of the advantageous state (for example, a state after the next game after the end of the bonus) is performed in relation to the end of the control of the advantageous state. A state suggestion display means (for example, a process of displaying a state suggestion at t37 after t35, which is the timing at which the sub-control unit 91 ends the warning display) is provided.
A gaming machine is also disclosed in which the display period of the state suggestion display is longer than the display period of the warning display (for example, the display period of the state suggestion display is longer than the display period of the warning display).

According to such a configuration, the display period of the state suggestion display is not longer than the display period of the warning display, and the player feels that the warning display is troublesome by prolonging the warning display compared to the gaming machine. It can be made difficult, and the player can be preferably alerted.

(A-10) Also, in the present application,
Advantageous result display means (for example, sub-control unit 91 is a bonus) that displays an advantageous result (for example, result notification, display of a result image 51d) that notifies the result of controlling the advantageous state in relation to the end of control of the advantageous state. (Processing to notify the result at the end)
The display period of the advantageous result display is longer than the display period of the warning display (for example, the display period of the result notification result image 51d is longer than the display period of the warning display), and the gaming machine is also disclosed. ing.

According to such a configuration, the display period of the advantageous result display is not longer than the display period of the warning display, and the player feels that the warning display is troublesome by prolonging the warning display compared to the gaming machine. It can be made difficult, and the player can be preferably alerted.

(A-11) Further, in the present application,
When the interruption condition (for example, the condition for causing an error or the condition for causing a power failure) is satisfied when the warning display is performed, the warning display becomes invisible to the player (for example). , If a power failure occurs during the alert display, the alert display will be interrupted and invisible),
When the interruption release condition (for example, a condition for canceling an error, a condition for recovering a power failure) is satisfied after the interruption condition is satisfied in the case where the caution display is performed. In addition, the warning display is performed again for a predetermined period in a display mode that can be visually recognized by the player (for example, an error occurs when the sub-control unit 91 gives priority to the error display over the result notification or the warning display. Is released and the error display is finished, the warning display is performed again for a predetermined period so that the player can see it, and when the sub-control unit 91 interrupts the warning display, the power is cut off. When it is restored, the warning display will be displayed again for a specified period so that the player can see it),
When the interruption condition is satisfied in the case where the advantage suggestion display is performed, the advantage suggestion display becomes invisible to the player (for example, if a power failure occurs during the caution display, the bonus lamp 26 Lighting is interrupted and becomes invisible),
The advantage suggestion display means does not perform the advantage suggestion display even if the interruption release condition is satisfied after the interruption condition is satisfied when the advantage suggestion display is performed (for example, the bonus lamp 26 is lit). If an error occurs during, the bonus lamp 26 is turned off and the bonus lamp 26 is not turned on again even if the error is cleared. If a power failure occurs while the bonus lamp 26 is on, the bonus lamp 26 is turned off and the power is cut off. Even if it recovers, the bonus lamp 26 will not be turned on again),
When the interruption condition is satisfied when the setting suggestion display is performed, the setting suggestion display becomes invisible to the player (for example, if a power failure occurs during the setting suggestion display, the setting suggestion display is displayed. (Interrupted and invisible),
When the interruption release condition is satisfied after the interruption condition is satisfied in the case where the setting suggestion display is performed, the setting suggestion display means performs the setting suggestion display again in the basic mode (for example,). When the sub-control unit 91 prioritizes the error display over the result notification, alert display, and setting suggestion display, when the error is cleared and the error display ends, the setting suggestion display is displayed without adding the effect display. Perform again, and when the sub-control unit 91 interrupts the setting suggestion display and the power failure is restored, the setting suggestion display is performed again without adding the effect display).
When the interruption condition is satisfied in the case where the advantageous result display is performed, the advantageous result display becomes invisible to the player (for example, if a power failure occurs during the result notification, the result image of the result notification The display of 51d was interrupted and became invisible),
The advantageous result display means redisplays the advantageous result when the interruption release condition is satisfied after the interruption condition is satisfied in the case where the advantageous result display is performed (for example, a sub control unit). When the error display is prioritized over the result notification and the warning display, the display of the result notification result image 51d is restarted when the error is cleared and the error display is finished, and the sub-control unit 91 pays attention. When the power failure is restored when the arousal display is interrupted, the result notification result image 51d is displayed again), and when the advantageous result display is performed with the effect display added, the interruption is performed. When the condition is satisfied, the advantageous result display is performed again with the effect display added (for example, if the effect display is added to the result image 51d before the sub-control unit 91 displays the error, the effect display is displayed. The display of the result image 51d is restarted in the added state, and if the effect display is added to the result image 51d before the power failure occurs, the sub-control unit 91 displays the result image 51d again with the effect display added. ),
When the interruption release condition is satisfied after the interruption condition is satisfied in the case where the warning display is performed, the setting operation means by the player after a predetermined period has elapsed from the establishment of the interruption release condition. The operation is enabled (for example, when the sub-control unit 91 displays the error display with priority over the result notification or the warning display, the warning display is restarted when the error is cleared and the error display ends. After a predetermined period of time has passed since the warning display is completed, the player activates the operation of the effect switch 56, and when the sub-control unit 91 interrupts the warning display, the warning is alerted when the power failure is restored. A game machine is also disclosed (which enables the player to operate the effect switch 56 after a predetermined period has elapsed since the display was resumed and the warning display is completed).

According to such a configuration, the player is more preferably alerted than the gaming machine in which the alerting display is not performed again for a predetermined period in a display mode that can be visually recognized by the player when the interruption release condition is satisfied. be able to. Further, according to such a configuration, it is possible to reduce that the player's attention to the warning display deviates from the advantage suggestion display as compared with the game machine that redisplays the advantage suggestion display when the interruption release condition is satisfied, which is preferable. It is possible to call attention to the player. Further, according to such a configuration, the player's attention to the alert display is more focused on the setting suggestion display than the game machine in which the setting suggestion display is performed again in a mode different from the basic mode when the interruption release condition is satisfied. It is possible to reduce the deviation and preferably call the player's attention. Further, according to such a configuration, the player feels more uncomfortable with the advantageous result display that is performed again by the player than the game machine that does not perform the advantageous result display again with the effect display added when the interruption release condition is satisfied. It becomes difficult, and it is possible to reduce that the player's attention to the caution display deviates from the advantageous result display, and it is possible to preferably call the player's attention. Further, according to such a configuration, the player pays more attention to the warning display than the game machine that does not invalidate the operation of the setting operation means by the player until a predetermined period elapses after the interruption release condition is satisfied. It is possible to reduce the deviation from the display on the setting screen, and it is possible to preferably alert the player.

(A-12) Further, in the present application,
An abnormality display means (for example, the sub-control unit 91) capable of displaying an abnormality (for example, an error display) indicating that the abnormality is in an abnormal state (for example, an error state or a special state) when an abnormality occurs is displayed. Processing)
When an abnormality occurs in the case where the warning display is performed, the abnormality display means performs the abnormality display in preference to the warning display (for example, the sub-control unit 91 results in the error display). Priority is given to the display of notifications, alerts, and RT effect selection screens),
The warning display means displays the warning display in a display mode that can be visually recognized by the player when the abnormal state is released when the error display is performed in preference to the warning display. It is performed again over a predetermined period (for example, when the sub-control unit 91 displays the error display with priority over the result notification or the warning display, the player can see it when the error is cleared and the error display ends. Re-display the alert for a specified period of time),
The advantage suggestion display means displays the advantage suggestion before the abnormality display is started when the abnormality state is released in the case where the abnormality display is performed in preference to the caution display. The advantage suggestion display is not performed regardless of whether or not it has been performed (for example, if an error occurs while the bonus lamp 26 is lit, the bonus lamp 26 is turned off and the bonus lamp 26 is not turned on again even if the error is cleared. ),
The setting suggestion display means displays the setting suggestion before the abnormality display is started when the abnormality state is released in the case where the abnormality display is performed in preference to the caution display. If so, the setting suggestion display is performed again in the basic mode (for example, when the sub control unit 91 displays the error display with priority over the result notification, the alert display, or the setting suggestion display, the error is cleared. If the setting suggestion display is performed before the error display when the error display is finished, the setting suggestion display is continued without adding the effect display,),
The advantageous result display means displays the advantageous result before the abnormal display is started when the abnormal state is released in the case where the abnormal display is performed in preference to the warning display. If this is done, the advantageous result display is performed again (for example, when the error display is prioritized over the result notification or warning display when the sub-control unit 91 displays the error display with priority) and the error display ends. The display of the result image 51d is restarted), and if the advantageous result display is performed with the effect display added before the abnormality display is started, the effect display adds the advantageous result display. (For example, if the effect display is added to the result image 51d before the error is displayed, the display of the result image 51d is restarted with the effect display added).
When the abnormal state is released in the case where the abnormal display is given priority over the warning display, the setting operation means by the player after the predetermined period has elapsed after the abnormal state is released. The operation is enabled (for example, when the sub-control unit 91 displays the error display with priority over the result notification or the warning display, the warning display is restarted when the error is cleared and the error display ends. The operation of the effect switch 56 by the player is enabled after the warning display is completed after a predetermined period has elapsed), and the game machine is also disclosed.

According to such a configuration, when the abnormality display is given priority over the caution display, the caution display is displayed for a predetermined period in a display mode that can be visually recognized by the player when the abnormal state is released. It is possible to call attention to the player more preferably than the game machine that does not perform again. Further, according to such a configuration, when the abnormality display is given priority over the warning display, the warning display is displayed more than the game machine that redisplays the advantageous suggestion when the abnormal state is released. It is possible to reduce the deviation of the player's attention from the advantage suggestion display, and it is possible to preferably call the player's attention. Further, according to such a configuration, a game in which the setting suggestion display is performed again in a mode different from the basic mode when the abnormal state is released in the case where the abnormal display is prioritized over the warning display. It is possible to reduce the player's attention to the alert display rather than the machine from the setting suggestion display, and it is possible to preferably alert the player to the alert display. Further, according to such a configuration, when the abnormal state is displayed in preference to the warning display, the advantageous result display is not performed again with the effect display added when the abnormal state is canceled. It is less likely that the player will feel uncomfortable with the advantageous result display that is performed again than the game machine, and it is possible to reduce the player's attention to the warning display from being deviated from the advantageous result display, and preferably to alert the player. Can be done. Further, according to such a configuration, when the abnormality display is given priority over the warning display, the operation of the setting operation means by the player is invalidated until a predetermined period elapses after the abnormal state is released. It is possible to reduce the deviation of the player's attention to the alert display from the display of the setting screen as compared with the game machine that does not set the alert, and it is possible to preferably alert the player to the alert display.

(B-1) Further, in the present application,
A gaming machine that plays a game (for example, a slot machine 1, a pachinko gaming machine).
Advantageous state control means (for example, main control unit 41) that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous for the player (for example, a bonus for slot machine 1, ART, a big hit game state for a pachinko game machine, and a small hit game state). Is a process that controls bonuses and ART),
A warning display means (for example, the sub control unit 91 ends the bonus) that performs a warning display (for example, a warning display, a warning image 51e) for calling the player to call attention in connection with the end of control of the advantageous state. (Processing that sometimes displays a warning) and
Setting screen display means (for example, sub-control unit 91) capable of displaying a setting screen (for example, menu screen) for making settings related to the game in connection with the operation of the setting operation means (for example, the effect switch 56) by the player. Is equipped with a process of receiving the operation of the production switch 56 by the player and displaying the menu screen after the end of each game).
The setting screen display means does not display the setting screen even if the setting operation means is operated by the player while the caution display is being performed, while the setting is made by the player after the warning display is completed. When the operating means is operated, the setting screen is displayed (for example, the sub-control unit 91 invalidates the operation of the effect switch 56 by the player when the caution display is being performed, and the effect switch 56 is set. While the menu screen is not displayed even if it is operated, the menu screen is displayed when the player activates the operation of the effect switch 56 at t35, which is the timing to end the warning display, and the effect switch 56 is operated.) , The game machine is disclosed.

According to such a configuration, when the setting operation means is operated by the player not only after the warning display is finished but also when the warning display is performed, the warning is called more than the game machine that displays the setting screen. It is possible to reduce that the player's attention to the display deviates from the display on the setting screen, and it is possible to preferably call the player's attention.
In the present application, the "warning display for urging the player to call attention" also includes a suppression display for urging the player to excessively suppress the game.
Therefore, in the present application,
A gaming machine that plays a game (for example, a slot machine 1, a pachinko gaming machine).
Advantageous state control means (for example, main control unit 41) that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous for the player (for example, a bonus for slot machine 1, ART, a big hit game state for a pachinko game machine, and a small hit game state). Is a process that controls bonuses and ART),
Suppression display means (for example, the sub-control unit 91 is a bonus) that performs a suppression display (for example, a warning display, a display of a warning image 51e) that prompts the player to suppress excessive games in connection with the end of control of the advantageous state. Processing to display a warning at the end) and
Setting screen display means (for example, sub-control unit 91) capable of displaying a setting screen (for example, menu screen) for making settings related to the game in connection with the operation of the setting operation means (for example, the effect switch 56) by the player. Is equipped with a process of receiving the operation of the production switch 56 by the player and displaying the menu screen after the end of each game).
The setting screen display means does not display the setting screen even if the setting operation means is operated by the player while the suppression display is being performed, while the setting operation means is performed by the player after the suppression display is completed. Is operated, the setting screen is displayed (for example, the sub-control unit 91 invalidates the operation of the effect switch 56 by the player when the alert display is being performed, and the effect switch 56 is operated. However, while the menu screen is not displayed, the menu screen is displayed when the effect switch 56 is operated by enabling the player to operate the effect switch 56 at t35, which is the timing to end the warning display). The machine is also disclosed.

(B-2) Further, in the present application,
A display means for displaying an image (for example, a liquid crystal display 51) is further provided.
The setting screen display means causes the display means to display the setting screen (for example, the sub control unit 91 causes the menu screen to be displayed on the liquid crystal display 51).
The caution display means causes the display means to display an image that calls attention to the player as the caution display (for example, the sub-control unit 91 causes the caution screen 51e to be displayed on the liquid crystal display 51). The machine is also disclosed.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the same display means from displaying an image that calls attention to the player when the setting screen is displayed on the display means, and the setting screen is displayed on the display means. It is possible to call attention to the player more preferably than a game machine that displays an image that calls attention to the player on the same display means.

(B-3) Further, in the present application,
After the end of the warning display, the advantageous result display means (for example, the sub-control unit 91 displays the warning display) that performs the advantageous result display (for example, result notification, display of the result image 51d) that notifies the result of controlling the advantageous state. (Processing to notify the result after the end)
The setting screen display means displays the setting screen when the setting operation means is operated by the player while the advantageous result display is being performed (for example, the sub control unit 91 displays the result image 51d as a result notification). If the player operates the production switch 56 while is displayed, the menu screen can be displayed),
The advantageous result display means ends the advantageous result display when the display of the setting screen starts, and performs the advantageous result display again when the display of the setting screen ends (for example, the sub control unit 91). The display of the result image 51d is finished when the display of the menu screen is started, while the result image 51d is displayed again when the display of the menu screen is finished), and the gaming machine is also disclosed.

According to such a configuration, a game machine that displays an advantageous result not only after the end of the alert display but also when the alert display is performed, and the alert display is performed not only after the end of the alert display. It is possible to reduce the player's attention to the warning display from being deviated from the advantageous result display as compared with the game machine in which the advantageous result display ends or is performed again by the display of the setting screen even when the setting screen is displayed. Can call attention to.

(B-4) Further, in the present application,
After the end of the warning display, the advantageous result display means (for example, the sub-control unit 91 displays the warning display) that performs the advantageous result display (for example, result notification, display of the result image 51d) for notifying the result of controlling the advantageous state. (Processing to notify the result after the end),
A setting suggestion display (for example, a setting) that suggests a setting value selected from a plurality of types of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 6) having different advantages to the player in relation to the end of the warning display. It is provided with a setting suggestion display means (for example, a process of performing a setting suggestion display at t37 after t35, which is the timing at which the sub-control unit 91 ends the alert display).
The setting screen display means displays the setting screen when the setting operation means is operated by the player while the advantageous result display is being performed (for example, the sub control unit 91 displays the result image 51d as a result notification). If the player operates the production switch 56 while is displayed, the menu screen can be displayed),
The advantageous result display means ends the advantageous result display when the display of the setting screen starts, and performs the advantageous result display again when the display of the setting screen ends (for example, the sub control unit 91 When the display of the menu screen starts, the display of the result image 51d ends, while when the display of the menu screen ends, the result image 51d is displayed again).
The setting suggestion display means ends the setting suggestion display when the display of the setting screen starts, and performs the setting suggestion display again when the display of the setting screen ends (for example, the sub control unit 91 The setting suggestion display ends when the menu screen display starts, and the setting suggestion display is performed again when the menu screen display ends), and the game machine is also disclosed.

According to such a configuration, a game machine that displays an advantageous result not only after the end of the alert display but also when the alert display is performed, and the alert display is performed not only after the end of the alert display. It is possible to reduce the player's attention to the warning display from being deviated from the advantageous result display as compared with the game machine in which the advantageous result display ends or is performed again by the display of the setting screen even when the setting screen is displayed. Can call attention to. Further, according to such a configuration, the setting screen is displayed not only after the game machine that displays the setting suggestion regardless of the end of the alert display or after the end of the alert display but also when the alert display is performed. It is possible to reduce the deviation of the player's attention to the setting suggestion display to the setting suggestion display as compared with the game machine in which the setting suggestion display ends or is performed again, and it is possible to preferably call the player's attention.

(C-1) Further, in the present application,
A gaming machine that plays a game (for example, a slot machine 1, a pachinko gaming machine).
Advantageous state control means (for example, main control unit 41) that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous for the player (for example, a bonus for slot machine 1, ART, a big hit game state for a pachinko game machine, and a small hit game state). Is a process that controls bonuses and ART),
A warning display means (for example, the sub control unit 91 ends the bonus) that performs a warning display (for example, a warning display, a warning image 51e) for calling the player to call attention in connection with the end of control of the advantageous state. (Processing that sometimes displays a warning) and
A setting suggestion display (for example, a setting) suggesting a setting value selected from a plurality of types of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 6) having different advantages to the player in relation to the end of control of the advantageous state. It is provided with a setting suggestion display means (for example, a process of performing a setting suggestion display at t37 after t35, which is the timing at which the sub-control unit 91 ends the alert display).
A game machine is disclosed in which the display period of the setting suggestion display is longer than the display period of the warning display (for example, the display period of the setting suggestion display is longer than the display period of the warning display).

According to such a configuration, the display period of the setting suggestion display is not longer than the display period of the warning display, and the player feels that the warning display is troublesome by prolonging the warning display compared to the gaming machine. It can be made difficult, and the player can be preferably alerted.
In the present application, the "warning display for urging the player to call attention" also includes a suppression display for urging the player to excessively suppress the game.
Therefore, in the present application,
A gaming machine that plays a game (for example, a slot machine 1, a pachinko gaming machine).
Advantageous state control means (for example, main control unit 41) that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous for the player (for example, a bonus for slot machine 1, ART, a big hit game state for a pachinko game machine, and a small hit game state). Is a process that controls bonuses and ART),
Suppression display means (for example, the sub-control unit 91 is a bonus) that performs a suppression display (for example, a warning display, a display of a warning image 51e) that prompts the player to suppress excessive games in connection with the end of control of the advantageous state. Processing to display a warning at the end) and
A setting suggestion display (for example, a setting) suggesting a setting value selected from a plurality of types of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 6) having different advantages to the player in relation to the end of control of the advantageous state. It is provided with a setting suggestion display means (for example, a process of performing a setting suggestion display at t37 after t35, which is the timing at which the sub-control unit 91 ends the alert display).
A gaming machine is also disclosed in which the display period of the setting suggestion display is longer than the display period of the suppression display (for example, the display period of the setting suggestion display is longer than the display period of the caution display).

(C-2) Further, in the present application,
The effect display is added to the setting suggestion display, while the effect display is not added to the caution display (for example, the effect display is added to the setting suggestion display, while the effect display is added to the caution display. (Not done), the game machine is also disclosed.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel that the display of the warning display is more troublesome than the game machine in which the effect display is added not only to the setting suggestion display but also to the warning display. It is possible to preferably call the player's attention.

(C-3) Further, in the present application,
While the setting suggestion display is a moving image display, the caution display is not a moving image display (for example, the setting suggestion display is a scroll display moving image display, while the caution display is a still image warning image. The display of 51e) and the gaming machine are also disclosed.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel that the display of the warning display is more troublesome than that of the gaming machine in which not only the setting suggestion display but also the warning display is a moving image display, which is preferable. It is possible to call attention to the player.

It should be considered that the embodiments disclosed this time are exemplary in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims rather than the above description, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

1 slot machine, 1a housing, 1b front door, 2C, 2L, 2R reel, 3 see-through window, 4 medal insertion part, 6 MAXBET switch, 7 start switch, 8C, 8L, 8R stop switch, 9 medal payout exit, 10 Settlement switch, 11 credit display, 12 game auxiliary display, 13 game display, 23 reset switch, 24
Set value indicator, 26 bonus lamp, 27 side lamp, 28 reel backlight, 30 flow path switching solenoid, 31a, 31b, 31c input medal sensor, 32C, 32L, 32R reel motor, 33C, 33L, 33R reel sensor, 34 Hopper unit, 34b hopper motor, 34c payout sensor, 35a full tank sensor, 37 setting key switch, 38 setting switch, 40 game control board, 41 main control unit, 41b ROM, 41c RAM, 41d I / O port, 50 game information display Instrument, 51 LCD display, 53, 54 speakers, 56 Production switch, 61 1st output port, 62 2nd output port, 63 3rd output port, 71 Sub liquid crystal display, 90 Production control board, 91 Sub control unit

Claims (1)

It is a game machine that plays games
An advantageous state control means that can control an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player,
A warning display means for displaying a warning to the player in connection with the end of control of the advantageous state, and
A setting suggestion display means for displaying a setting suggestion suggesting a setting value selected from a plurality of types of setting values having different advantages in relation to the end of control of the advantageous state, and
It is equipped with a setting screen display means capable of displaying a setting screen for making settings related to the game in relation to the operation of the setting operation means by the player.
The setting screen display means does not display the setting screen even if the setting operation means is operated by the player while the warning display is being performed, while the setting is made by the player after the warning display is completed. When the operating means is operated, the setting screen is displayed and
A gaming machine in which the display period of the setting suggestion display is longer than the display period of the warning display.

Images